Product-Manual

DaVis 7.2 Software

Item-Number(s): 1005xxx

LaVision
We count on Photons

Product-Manual for DaVis 7.2

LaVision GmbH, Anna-Vandenhoeck-Ring 19, D-37081 Gttingen Produced by LaVision GmbH, Gttingen Printed in Germany Gttingen, March 4, 2009

Document name: 1003001_DaVis_D72.pdf

Contents

Contents
1 Welcome to the LaVision DaVis Software 1.1 1.2 1.3 About DaVis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 14 16 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 22 23 24 24 26 29 37 37 38 38 40 41 41 3

2 Installation 2.1 2.2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Checking the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation of a DaVis update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninstall DaVis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Hardware Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remarks to other Software and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 2.6.2 Using dongles for DaVis 6 and DaVis 7 . . . . . . . . . Anti Virus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of a Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If DaVis does not detect the Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . Dongle Driver Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninstall the Dongle Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of a Network Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . How DaVis remembers the Dongle Type . . . . . . . . .

2.7

The Dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6

3 Getting Started 4 Startup DaVis 4.1 4.2 Startup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 Start Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Busy Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.5 4.6

How to Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the List of Enabled Packages . . . . . . . . . . User Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The labbook dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macros for the Labbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42 43 44 46 47 47 47 47 52 54 54 55 57 57 59 60 60 63 63 64 65 67 67 69 69 71 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 79 79 83

Personal Labbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Global Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 The Macro Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a simple Macro Creation . . . . . . . . . . . Error Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Hardware Setup 5.1 Hardware Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.2 5.3 Adding new Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Data Analyser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Device Settings 6.0.1 6.0.2 6.0.3 6.0.4 6.0.5 6.0.6 6.0.7 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intensity Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Correction on Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Data Online Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Device Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Device Data Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 The Project 7.1 7.2 4 The Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

Create a new project with existing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 Execute Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of single-frame Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of double-frame Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of double-frame Images in single Files . . . . . Multi Set Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hyperloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86 86 87 88 90 91 91 92 93 96 98 99

7.7

Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7.1 7.7.2

7.8 7.9

Hyperloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorganize

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 105

8 Data Buers 8.1 8.2 8.1.1 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2

About Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Buer Properties, Attributes and Scales . . . . . . . . . 105 General Buer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Changing the buer size or format . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a new buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Default Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Buer Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Prole Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Camera Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Change Buer Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Scales and CL-Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Root Mean Square (RMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 RMS on vector buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Create new string attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Additional dialogs for attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Buer Frame Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 DaVis Filetypes for Images and Vectors . . . . . . . . . 118 General Filetypes for Export and Import . . . . . . . . . 119 5 Buer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Buer Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Buer Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Buer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Contents

8.6.3 8.6.4

Special Filetypes for Proles, Sets and Overlays . . . . . 121 Reading DaVis Filetypes with other Software . . . . . . 123 125

9 Image and Vector Display 9.1 9.2

Image and Vector Windows and View Types . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Palettes and Color LookUp Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 Color Mapping and Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Examples for Color Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Gamma Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Edit Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Add Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Range of Proles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Display of Buer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Color Image Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Frames and Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Vector Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Vector Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Vector Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

9.3

Data and Display Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9

9.3.10 Raw Vector Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9.3.11 Mouse Window for Zoom and more . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9.4 Window Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 6 Resolution Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Zoom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Line and Angle Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Zoom into Mouse Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Window Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Simple (2D) Image View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Multiframe Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Scatter Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 External Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 3D Prole Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Spreadsheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 User interaction to change 3D scene via mouse/keyboard 167

View Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

OpenGL (3D) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Contents

9.6.3 9.6.4 9.7

Data and display properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Programming the 3D view with (additional) user dened objects in CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 About the Prole Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Functions of the Prole Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Prole Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Take a new Prole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Export to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Export to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Export AVI Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Prole Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 9.7.1 9.7.2 9.7.3 9.7.4

9.8

Export of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3

9.9

Correlation Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 195

10 Recording

10.1 Window Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 10.2 Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 10.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 10.4 Recording Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 10.5 General Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 10.6 Recording Sequence items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 10.6.1 Image Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 10.6.2 Reference time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 10.6.3 Reference time dt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 10.6.4 Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 10.6.5 Table scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 10.6.6 Wait for trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 10.6.7 Wait for key pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 10.6.8 User scan device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 10.6.9 CL command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 10.6.10 Image Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 10.7 User dened parameter/scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 10.8 Fast Data Acquisition and Online Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 10.8.1 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 10.8.2 Acquisition Sequence Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 10.9 AOI Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 10.10Hotkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 7

Contents

11 Batch Processing

219

11.1 Operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 11.1.1 Load/Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 11.2 Streaming mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 11.3 Hyperloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 11.4 Available Groups for All Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 11.4.1 Operation: copy and reorganize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 11.4.2 Operation: user function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 11.5.1 Operation: basic image arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 11.5.2 Operation: image mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 11.5.3 Operation: attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 11.5.4 Operation: statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 11.5.5 Operation: copy and reorganize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 11.5.6 Operation: time series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 11.5.7 Operation: linear lter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 11.5.8 Operation: user dened linear lter . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 11.5.9 Operation: non-linear lter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 11.5.10 Operation: proles and time plots . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 11.5.11 Operation: intensity correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 11.5.12 Operation: rgb lter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 11.5.13 Operation: image stitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld . . . . . . . . . 245 11.6.1 Operation: basic vector arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 11.6.2 Operation: vector mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 11.6.3 Operation: extract scalar eld: vector component . . . . 247 11.6.4 Operation: extract scalar eld: divergence . . . . . . . . 249 11.6.5 Operation: extract scalar eld: rotation and shear . . . 250 11.6.6 Operation: extract scalar eld: strain . . . . . . . . . . 251 11.6.7 Operation: extract scalar eld: others . . . . . . . . . . 253 11.6.8 Operation: extract proles : Vr / Vangle (polar coordinates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 11.6.9 Operation: time series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 11.6.10 Operation: non-linear lter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 11.6.11 Operation: statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 11.7 Overlay Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 11.8 Mask Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 8

Contents

12 DaVis in Classic Style

273

12.1 Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 12.2 Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 12.3 Special Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 12.3.1 Buer List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 12.3.2 Palette (CLUT) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 12.3.3 Info Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 12.4 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 12.4.1 Load File and Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 12.4.2 Printing a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 12.4.3 Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 12.4.4 Logout and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 12.4.5 Edit Customer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 12.5 Buer Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 12.5.1 Loading Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 12.5.2 Browse Image les (and load to buer) . . . . . . . . . . 283 12.5.3 Saving a Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 12.5.4 Import of Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 12.5.5 Loading and Saving of SETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 12.6 Buer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 12.6.1 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 12.6.2 Delete Selected Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 12.6.3 Viewing Buers as a Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 12.7 Rectangle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 12.7.1 Active Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 12.7.2 Set Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 12.8 Compute Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 12.8.1 Overow, Underow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 12.8.2 Segmentation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 12.8.3 Frame Buer To Single Buer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 12.9 Acquisition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 12.9.1 Take Single Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 12.9.2 Continuous Grabbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 12.9.3 Action during Grabbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 12.10Devices Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 12.11Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 12.11.1 List of open windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 12.11.2 Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 9

Contents

A Appendix 303 A.1 Software Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 A.2 Software Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 B Customer Service B.1 Order and Dongle Number . B.2 Customer Settings . . . . . B.3 Log.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 Shipment of defective items Index 305 305 306 307 307 311

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

10

1 Welcome to the LaVision DaVis Software

1.1 About DaVis

DaVis is a CCD image acquisition and processing program developed by LaVision. The software without hardware access is running on all Windows version since Windows 95. Some hardware is restricted to dened operating systems and can not be used on all Windows PCs. DaVis is especially developed for LaVisions camera systems and to control a great variety of other devices like stepmotors, spectrographs and lasers. Given the spectrum of compatible devices and LaVisions accumulated years of experience, DaVis possesses the versatile to control and evaluate a wide range of imaging and spectroscopy measurements (e.g. PIV and PTV "Particle Image and Tracking Velocimetry", Spray Analysis, Rayleigh, Raman, LIF "Laser Induced Fluorescence", Tracer-LIF, Picosecond Lifetimes). DaVis is continuously improved to t for the requirements and applications. Specic features for new customers can be incorporated into the software on request. Please, do not hesitate to contact LaVision! A team of experienced physicists and programmers creates a solution to t your needs.

1.2

About this Manual

This manual is about the usage of the DaVis software. Detailed information on the macro language are given in the Command Language Manual. Dependant on the system their are more manuals shipped, e.g. the PIV FlowMaster Manual. Working with DaVis for the First Time Working with the software and "playing with it" is the best way to get to know DaVis. Whenever a problem arises or more explanations are desired, the mouse should be moved onto a button or another dialog item and stay there 11

1 Welcome to the LaVision DaVis Software

for a short time. Then a so called tool tip window opens: a small window with a short description about the dialog item. For more information about a certain topic the DaVis online help can be opened (appendix on Help Menu, see page 40): Press the F1 key in a dialog to start the online help for this dialog. Getting More Experience If you have any suggestions how to improve the program and the manual, please let us know.

1.3

Conventions

Throughout the manual certain types of information are printed in a special way or at special layout positions. Courier Anything which is a computer command (user input, macro programs, variable name etc.) or a le name is printed in Courier. We would write, for example, DAVIS.EXE (The command to start DaVis) Capital letters If certain keys be pressed on the keyboard, these keys appear in capital letters, e.g. ENTER denotes the Enter key (it is also called return key). If two keys have to be pressed at the same time, this is denoted with a plus between the keys. For example, CTRL+I means that the user should press and hold the Control key CTRL (German keyboards: STRG) and press the key I at the same time. Bold Letters Bold letters are used for dialog names, button names or other text items in a dialog.

12

2 Installation
2.1 System Requirements

For the installation of the evaluation licence of DaVis 7 following minimum specications of the computer are required: A PC with 512 MB RAM, 1 GHz CPU or higher, operation system XP Professionalwith Service Pack 1, both in the English or German version. Other language versions may work but are not supported and tested by LaVision. 100 MB available space on hard disc is required for the software installation and 300 MB for optional example les. The display properties of the system should be set to a normal text size. Otherwise dialogs could be displayed somehow corrupt with incomplete or hidden texts items. This parameter can be changed on english Windows versions under Control Panel - Display - Appearence, then Windows and Buttons and Font Size. On german Windows versions open Systemsteuerung - Anzeige - Darstellung, then change Fenster und Schaltaechen and Schriftgrad. For the 3D display on most PCs the hardware acceleration can be set to maximum. This parameter can be changed on english Windows versions under Control Panel - Display - Settings, then press button Advanced and use card Troubleshoot. On german Windows versions open Systemsteuerung - Anzeige - Einstellungen, then press button Erweitert and use card Problembehandlung. On Windows XP systems the user should either get administration privileges, or the DaVis directory and the data directory must be setup with complete access privilegs for the user. Please ask your system administrator to dene the correct privileges. Special settings may be needed for a anti virus software or a local rewall, see section on page 20. 13

2 Installation

2.2

Software Installation

Usually DaVis is already installed in the system delivered by LaVision. So, there is no further installation necessary. The manually installation of software and hardware is described in the following sections. The Linux version, e.g. used for distributed computing, is not included into the standard installation program. The installation guide can be found in the manual about Remote Control and Distributed Computing.

2.2.1

Checking the Operating System

The DaVis software is designed and tested for the most important Windows versions at the time of delivery. Some hardware devices may be used on a special Windows version only and will not be supported on other Windows versions. Whenever you want to change or upgrade your operating system, please contact LaVision before the installation to request information about support of your hardware and about new software versions. For cameras and other hardware devices, please contact LaVision to choose the appropriate main board. If DaVis detects an unkown operating system, it gives a message to the user and does not start.

2.2.2

Installation

When installing a non-demo DaVis for the rst time on a PC, the user must be logged in with administration privileges. All installations beside a demonstration version can be completed only, if a dongle is connected to your PC (see section on page 20). Please connect the dongle to your PC after installing the DaVis software and all drivers, and before the rst start of DaVis! Please compare the Licence Code number from your dongle and your Customer Settings disk. Both numbers must be equal for the correct installation. Insert the oppy disc Customer Settings into the oppy disc device, if LaVision prepared special settings or functions. Or copy your Customer Settings le, a le of type SET, to a known place on your PC. You can select the place during the installation. Without the Customer Settings it is only possible to install a standard version without hardware, a standard PIV system without hardware or a demonstration version of DaVis. Insert the DaVis CD-Rom into your CD device and start the SETUP.EXE program from the CD drive, if it is not executed automatically. 14

2.2 Software Installation

Restart the PC when the installation of a non-demonstration version has nished. Selecting Components Attention: Dont change the selection of the components if you install with the prepared oppy disc Customer Settings!

Figure 2.1: Component selection in the DaVis installer. To change the selection (see example in gure 2.1) either press the Change button to select single components of a group or click the select box left to the group name (this selects ALL components of this group). Program: includes the DaVis software itself without any hardware drivers Examples: images for PIV, TracerLIF, Spray, Motor or Other Help: the DaVis online help, divided in parts Software (for all installations), and PIV or other packages depending on the customer licence. Driver: for all supported cameras and other devices. Please only select the drivers you need! If you are using a Customer Settings oppy disc, the needed drivers are preselected. For more information about the installation of special hardware devices see the section on page 19. 15

2 Installation

Reader and Editor: The Acrobat Reader must be installed on your system to read the online help. A possibly older version of this reader software is available on the installation CD. A useful text editor can be installed to program own macros.

During the installation a DaVis icon is copied onto your desktop. The software can be started later by a double-click onto the icon. If hardware drivers are installed, e.g. for some cameras, the PC must be rebooted before starting DaVis. An evaluation version can be executed immediately after connecting the dongle.

2.3

Installation of a DaVis update

LaVision provides the latest DaVis version in the download area of the www.lavision.de web site. Please note that for access to the download area you need to have a valid user account. In order to obtain this you need to register specifying your email address and order no. of your system or your dongle number respectively.

16

2.3 Installation of a DaVis update

Note
Do not delete the existing DaVis version. Keep this as a fall back until the new version has been installed and tested successfully. Dont install or update any driver for the hardware components (e.g. PTU or framegrabber) since they are working properly in the old version! Updating the driver can be complicated. A corrupt driver will stop you from using the system in any DaVis version.

For the installation of the DaVis please proceed as follows: Download the latest DaVis version as exe-le from the download area of the LaVision web site and copy this into a temporary directory on the system PC. Copy the customer settings le into a dierent empty temporary directory of the system PC. The customer settings are available in the Settings directory of the original installation CD. If the original installation CD contains an older DaVis version we recommend to contact LaVision by email (service@laivsion.de) to get an updated customer settings le. Please include the original customer settings le as attachment to your email. Start the DaVis install shield by a double-click on the exe-le. Select the Specify location of customer setting option in the install shield and refer to the temporary directory that contains the set le.

17

2 Installation

Select a NEW directory for the installation. DONT OVERWRITE existing DaVis versions.

DO NOT MODIFY the features that are activated by the customer settings le. Especially do not unselect any activated driver. This option makes sure that the required les are copied to the DaVis directory. Use the NEXT buttons to run through the install shield and wait until all steps are terminated properly.

DONT INSTALL any plug&play driver even if the install shield will show corresponding instructions in pop-up dialogs. The install shield assumes that no driver are installed until now. In order to double-check that the driver for the used hardware components are installed and working properly use the Windows Device Manager. 18

2.4 Uninstall DaVis

Restart the PC. Start DaVis.

2.4

Uninstall DaVis

All additional hardware drivers must be uninstalled with their own uninstalling programs! For german versions of Windows: Click on Start - Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung. Doubleclick Software, select the entry DaVis in the software list and press button Hinzufgen/Entfernen. For english versions of Windows: Click on Start - Settings - Control Panel. Doubleclick Add/Remove Programs, select the entry DaVis in the software list and press button Add/Remove. Then delete the DaVis directory and the remaining backup les in the subdirectories.

2.5

Installing Hardware Devices

For some cameras or other hardware devices special installations are required. Special instructions can be found in the Hardware manuals. The following instructions are general and working for most devices: When rebooting the PC the Windows device manager detects a new hardware device. The system asks the user to select the driver position. Please select the subdirectory Drivers on your DaVis CD-Rom and press button Continue. 19

2 Installation

Now the device will be included in the device manager. Then DaVis is able to use the device.

2.6
2.6.1

Remarks to other Software and Hardware

Using dongles for DaVis 6 and DaVis 7

When DaVis 6 and DaVis 7 should be executed on the same PC, please make sure that DaVis 6 has been started once before installing DaVis 7 and before connecting the new dongle to your PC! When DaVis 6 is installed and executed after DaVis 7, then please remove the new dongle, connect the dongle for DaVis 6 only and then start DaVis 6. DaVis 6 will remember its own dongle and not search and be confused by the DaVis 7 dongle. Later the new dongle can be connected, too, and you can run both software version with both dongles connected.

2.6.2

Anti Virus Software

To reach a faster storage speed, please congure the letypes to be scanned by your anti virus software: The DaVis letypes IM7, VC7, IMG, IMX and VEC should not be scanned, because these les include image or vector data and no executable code. Filetype CL includes macro commands to be executed by the DaVis software, but possible problems will not be detected by any anti virus software.

2.7

The Dongle

LaVision protects the usage of the DaVis software by a dongle. Five dierent hardware types of dongles are available (see gure 2.2 for an image): The parallel dongle in black color and the network dongle in red color must be connected to the parallel port of the PC. The serial dongle in gray and green color can be connected either to the parallel port or to a serial Com-port. The small blue USB dongle or the green USB network dongle is for the Universal Serial Bus port and does not work on Windows 95 or Windows NT systems. Multi Licence Network Dongle If you are using more than one or two PCs with DaVis, e.g. one system for your experiment in the laboratory and some more PCs for data processing in your oce, and if you dont want to connect dongles to all PCs, you can get one network dongle from LaVision. 20

2.7 The Dongle

Figure 2.2: Dongle types from upper left to lower right: dual dongle for parallel and serial port, parellel port dongle, USB dongle, network (parallel port) dongle. The new green USB network dongle is missing on this image. The network dongle is available in versions for the parallel port of a PC and for the USB interface. The dongle server should be running the complete day, e.g. use your le server with Windows or Linux operating system. A network dongle is delivered with a xed number of licences. Please contact LaVision sales department for a network dongle.

2.7.1

Installation of a Dongle

Note: During the installation from CD the dongle driver is automatically installed. Please dont connect the USB dongle to your system before nishing the installation! A command shell window is opened by the installation program, and this window must not be closed manually before the installation of the DaVis software nishes! The dongle driver installation may take a little time without any output into the command shell and without any further action in the installation program. On most systems the shell closes automatically. Manually Driver Installation The setup program can be executed manually, for example if the dongle driver is downloaded from the LaVision homepage. Therefore please open a command 21

2 Installation

shell and change into the DaVis subdirectory Drivers\Dongle or into the directory, where you stored the new dongle driver. Then execute the command dongle_install.bat or hldinst.exe -install to install the driver. With command dongle_info.bat or hldinst.exe -info the program displays information about the installed driver version. At least the les hardlock.sys and hlvdd.dll must be installed and displayed with a non-zero version number.

2.7.2

If DaVis does not detect the Dongle

If the last used dongle could not be detected, or if the detected dongle does not t to the installed licence key, then the dialog of gure 2.3 opens and asks for some user selection. On deeper driver problems you will get another error message, then please follow the instructions in the next section. If the last used dongle is not detected and if you dont want to change to another dongle, then please check if the dongle is connected to the PC. After connecting the dongle, select Repeat search for last dongle and press OK. If the dongle has been changed, then a new licence key has to be loaded. Select this item, press OK and then select the SET le including the new licence key. DaVis will load this key and restart automatically. If you are changing between a local and a network dongle, select one of the last three items: Either restrict the search to the local PC, or search the complete network for a dongle server, or give the IP address of the dongle server you want to connect to. The last item may be useful when working with more than one network dongle, or when the network dongle is not found on some reasons.

Figure 2.3: The dongle licence manager opens during startup, if a dongle problem has been detected.

22

2.7 The Dongle

Local Firewalls When using a network dongle, the rewall must be congured to accept communications between the network dongle server and the local host. The servers rewall must accept connections to the DaVis hosts. Local DaVis and dongle server are communicating on UDP port 3047. On Windows XP with Service Pack 2 the rewall asks during the rst start of DaVis, if the software should be blocked. Please answer with never blocking. When running the dongle server on Service Pack 2 with rewall, the administrator has to add the communication port as exception: Select the second card of the rewall setup dialog, the press button Port and type as name e.g. hlserver, as port 3047 and select UDP. After pressing the OK button and closing the rewall setup dialog the AKS Monitor will locate the dongle servers PC.

Two or more Network Devices On PCs with more than one network device, e.g. a second ethernet device or a WLAN device, the IP address of the network dongle must be entered. By default the dongle driver searches on the rst network interface, which is often the WLAN device.

2.7.3

Dongle Driver Problems

If DaVis is missing the dongle driver, then please repeat the installation and follow the instruction on page 21. If the driver is installed and the dongle connected to the PC, but not detected, then you have to check some hardware conguration of your PC. To enter the BIOS settup of the mainboard you have to reboot the PC. Press the Esc key or the F3 key during the startup of the PC. The key depends on the mainboard, but a small system message with a description is given on all PCs during the startup. Then change to the BIOS settings about onboard components (e.g. parallel port and USB interface).

USB Dongle For USB dongles check if the USB interface is enabled. If the USB dongle shows a ashing red light, then the dongle has a hardware fault and must be replaced. Please contact LaVision service departement. 23

2 Installation

Parallel Port Dongle Does the Windows system settings include the parallel port as a working device? Is another device working at the parallel port (without connecting the dongle), e.g. a printer? Select the settings for the parallel port in the system BIOS. The mode of the parallel port has to be bidirectional, ECP or EPP. The dongle can not be detected in unidirectional mode. Problems with Printer and Dongle LaVision does not guarantee the parallel port connection between dongle and printer. Some printers are not able to communicate through a dongle. Please ask for a USB, seriell or network dongle when having problems with this type of connection. Remote Desktop to Windows Server The error message Terminal Server detected will be displayed when starting DaVis on a Windows server operating system via Remote Desktop. On those systems DaVis is allowed to start on the real desktop only. Please use another remote desktop software like pcAnywhere or RAdmin, which is able to control the real desktop and which is not opening a virtual desktop. Windows XP 64 or Windows Server 64 bit There had been problems with the installation of the dongle driver and with detection of a local dongle on a 64 bit operation system like Windows XP 64 or a 64 bit Windows server version. Starting with a dongle driver release from January 2007 those problems had been xed. With newer versions a local dongle and a network dongle can be detected.

2.7.4

Uninstall the Dongle Driver

Restart the PC and dont start a DaVis before the uninstallation. Execute in DaVis subdirectory Drivers\Dongle the le Dongle_Uninstall.bat. In normal cases there is no need to uninstall the driver.

2.7.5

Installation of a Network Dongle

The red parallel dongle must be connected to the parallel port and the green USB dongle to the USB port of a Windows or Linux PC. In most cases a 24 hours per day running le server is used. In principle each free PC could be 24

2.7 The Dongle

used, even a PC running DaVis. The server-PC and of cause all PCs with DaVis must support the protocol TCP/IP.

Network Dongle Server for Windows Please put the DaVis CD into the destination (server) PC and execute both les Drivers\Dongle\hlsw32.exe and Drivers\Dongle\aksmon32.exe The setup programs will install the dongle driver, the program HL-Server and the network dongle monitor. Now you have to execute the monitor program, which can be found under Programs Aladdin Monitor AKS Monitor. If the name of the server PC is not listed on the left, then install and start the HL-service via menu Services Hardlock. Please select your PC in the tree on the the left side. Enter the Module address with value 11324 in the middle of the right area and press the Add button. Now you should see some entries in the lines above the Add button. When starting DaVis on this or on another PC, you will see the number in the current logins column changing. When using a rewall on the dongle server PC, e.g. the Windows XP with Service Pack 2 rewall, the communication port must be activated. Please read page 23 about Local Firewalls for a detailed description how to activate the port. The dongle server uses a default timeout of 15 minutes = 600 seconds for each dongle. DaVis regularly asks the dongle server for a valid licence. If the server is not asked for a certain time, then the server can give the licence to another DaVis in the network. When DaVis works on a time consuming processing, there might be a long time without request for a licence. Or when DaVis is stopped irregularly, the server gets no command to free the licence. The timeout can be changed by command line only. Please search for the folder of program hls32cmd. This should be copied to harddisc during installation of the dongle server. The default folder is C:/Program Files/HL-Server. Then open a command shell (Windows Start - Run) and execute e.g. to set a timeout of 15 minutes: "C:/Program Files/HL-Server/hls32cmd" -timeout 15 25

2 Installation

Network Dongle Server for Linux The driver software for Linux systems is running on dierent Linux distributions from SuSE, Red Hat and Debian. The installation needs root privilegs, so please contact your system administrator. The software is located on the DaVis CD in directory Drivers\Dongle\. Please copy the les linuxhlserver.zip, aksparlnx-*.rpm and aksusbd-*.rpm into a new directory on the server. Now install the rpm les corresponding to your Linux distribution, then unzip the server software. The server can be started for testing from command shell with hlserver -a -m:<module-addr> and later with option -d as daemon. The module address must be the address of the connected dongle. It can be useful to create a start script to load the needed modules and start hlserver during the boot process of the server PC. You can install the AKS Monitor on any Windows PC and control, if the dongle server is available and which PCs are logged in.

2.7.6

How DaVis remembers the Dongle Type

When DaVis is opened for the rst time, it searches for the connected dongle. At rst, the parallel ports and the USB port are asked for a dongle. If not found, the serial com-port is used, which takes more time than the searching at the parallel ports. By default DaVis is not searching for network dongles! When DaVis is closed, it stores the type of the connected dongle in some static variables in macro le Licence.cl (has been in GlobalSettings.CL before). For more information about variables in general please read the DaVis CL Manual. The names of the variable storing the dongle type is DongleAddr. All this variable values can be changed easily with a text editor. When using a network dongle, the variable DongleAddrNet should be set to the type of networking protocol (1 for Tcpip, 2 for IPX and 3 for NetBios). By default DaVis is set up to use the local ports only with variable DongleAddrNet = -1. Please set DongleAddrNet = 0 to search at all local ports and at all networks protocols. This unspecied search can take a long time. To increase the searching speed, the variable DongleAddrIp should be set to the IP-Address of the dongle server. Since DaVis 7 the dongle includes a unique serial number and the packages are enabled by the licence code in variable DongleCode. When a customer gets a new project package, the dongle must not be changed, but a new licence code 26

2.7 The Dongle

is delivered. A description of the way to transfer the new licence code into the DaVis software is given in section 4.3.2 on page 43. Each dongle gets a unique number, which is stored in the dongle and read out during the startup of DaVis and then stored in variable DongleCreationDate. This number is written on the dongle below the LaVision logo and written on the installation CD. Dening the port for dongle search String DonglePorts variable in macro le Licence.cl (has been in GlobalSettings.CL before) can be used to dene the ports, where DaVis should search for the dongle. By default, when the string is empty, DaVis searches at rst on the USB ports and then in the local network. To change the string, please close DaVis, then edit the le with a text editor, save the changed le and start DaVis again. When using a parallel or serial dongle, the variable has to be set by one of the following values: USB, 378p (for rst parallel port LPT1), 278p (for second parallel port LPT2), 2f8s (COM1) or 3f8s (COM2). If the PC includes nonstandard ports, e.g. an additional parallel port PCI interface, the hexadecimal address of this port must be given in the string.

27

2 Installation

28

3 Getting Started
This chapter is a short guide how to start the software, acquire some images with the customized hardware settings for cameras, average those images and display the mean image on screen.

Starting DaVis After the successfull installation and a reboot of the system DaVis is ready to start. Just double click the DaVis item on your desktop. The software will display a small startup dialog. In the status line on bottom of the startup screen some information are given about the loading of software modules and about the hardware initialization. If the dongle is not detected, an error dialog tells about the problems. Please read the sections on dongle installation on page 20. If there is a problem with the licence code, please read the section on page 43 about the way to install another software licence.

User Login If everything is ne during the startup, DaVis opens a maximized window and in the center a small dialog for Login. For this example please select the Normal User and press the Login button. If you know how to work with DaVis 6 you can login as Classic user and then try to use the same functions as before. But you will note a number of dierences between versions 6 and 7.

29

3 Getting Started

DaVis loads the user settings and, for the Normal User, opens the Project Manager dialog. During the rst login DaVis asks for a path to store all project data: settings, acquired images and processed data. The path may point to your local harddisc or to a network drive.

Creating a New Project

The Project Manager is splitted into three dierent areas: The upper left area gives access to all projects of the active project path. The lower left area displays in three cards the Info window with runtime information, a User Labbook with automatically generated or manually edited remarks, or the Properties of the project, which is selected in the tree view in the upper left area. The empty image on the right side is without meaning for the moment.

Now we want to create a new project, where the cameras can be used and images can be processed. Therefore please press the New button in the tool bar. The next dialog asks for the project name and type: Select default to generate a name including the type, date and time. The list of types includes all available projects: The minimal Imaging project is available for every customer and supports simple image recording and processing. All other projects depend on the customer licence and a special hardware conguration. They give access to special processing software, which is described in dedicated manuals. This manual includes the general functions of DaVis only. 30

For this example please select Imaging as type of the new project, then press the OK button.

The Imaging Project After creating a new Imaging project, DaVis displays the project type in the title bar and lists all existing recording directories in the tree view in the upper left area of the project dialog. During the rst start the tree view displays one item only: the name of your project. A fourth card has been added in the lower left area of the main dialog: The Project Labbook stores generated or customer edited information about the active project. This information will be stored in the project directory and is available after a re-opening of the project.

A New Recording Press button New in the tool bar to open the Recording dialog. This dialog includes a number of buttons on the left side and items to dene the image display, to show or hide parameter dialogs, and to acquire and immediately display cameras images, or to start a recording series of a number of images. 31

3 Getting Started

The Window Manager in the upper left corner denes the number and type of images to be displayed on the right: By default a 1 x 1 layout is used, and the single image is a camera image. When executing a postprocessing after image acquisition, a 2 x 1 layout should be enabled to display the camera image and the processed image. At rst let us use the Interactive mode: Just press the Take button or the F10-key to acquire a single image from your camera and display the image on screen. Maybe there is already some object visible in the camera image. You can improve the image by optimizing the acquisition parameters, e.g. the exposure time, in the hardware settings dialog.

Edit the Hardware Settings

Press the left Settings button, and the settings can be changed in the dialog on bottom of the DaVis main window. Expand the tree with double clicks on Devices and on Camera 1. Then select Camera 1 and edit e.g. the Area Of Interest or the Exposure Time in the card on the right. The example in the gure below shows a Test Image camera, which creates a random particle image to be used for vector calculation. Please read your hardware and camera manuals for more information about the available device parameters. 32

To change the focus or view angle of the camera, it would be uncomfortable to change the device settings a little and then press the Take button again to see what happens. Therefore the Grab button, also executed with the F11-key, starts an endless image acquisition and displays every image on screen. The grabbing can be stopped by pressing the Stop button in the tool bar or the Esc-key on your keyboard. Change the Display Parameters Is the displayed image too dark or too bright? Do you want to zoom into the image and view a selected area? At rst please click with your left mouse button into the camera image. The label on top of the image becomes blue. Then use the items in the tool bar to select a zoom factor (in percent), to zoom out of the image (the minus-button or the F3-key) or into the image (the plus-button or the F2-key).

The Opt.Size button ts the image into the available area. When the image is zoomed and scrollbars are visible, the scrollbars can be moved with the left mouse button to change the visible area.

The next group of tool bar buttons manages the Resolution settings. The pixel intensities are mapped into a palette of 256 colors. If the intensities are e.g. in a range of 0 to 4096 for a 12 bit camera, the resolution should be set to 4K. Just play a little with the Resolution list to see whats happening. The 33

3 Getting Started

resolution can be changed easily with the minus and plus buttons, or press the opt button to calculate the best tting resolution. Record a Set of Images When the hardware parameters are set to useful values, a complete series of images can be acquired. Press the second Settings button to open a dialog for the Acquisition Sequence. Open the tree by double clicks until the Image Acquisition parameters are visible.

Now dene the number of images to be acquired and select the show checkbox if the images should be displayed on screen during the recording. The Store images mode should be set to default, which automatically creates a folder name, using the date and time of the recording. Press the Start Recording button to execute the acquisition and storage of camera images. During the recording the status bar on bottom of the DaVis main window displays the number of recently acquired images and the frequency of acquisition. Display the Recording The images of the last recording can be displayed as a movie with the help of the Recorded dataset layout type: Activate the Camera Image or the Processed Image, then click onto the Recorded dataset item below of the Window Manager Layout settings. The buttons on bottom of the Recorded dataset window start or stop the movie, play it forward or backward or step by step. Move the slider to select a single image manually. For cameras with double exposure support the acquisition creates an image containing two frames: The rst frame has been acquired during the rst exposure, the second frame during the second exposure. By default such a 34

multi frame buer is displayed as a single image of the doubled height: the rst frame above and the second frame below. Another very useful view is the multiframe view (see example below), which can be enabled after clicking in the image with the right mouse button: Here both frames are displayed as single images at the same time. When zooming into the images and when moving the view point, both frames are displayed with the same zoom at the same viewpoint and with the same resolution.

Process the Recording The processing of recorded images is the execution of a mathematical function on each image: The function can either work on every single image, e.g. a lter function to smooth the image, or the function can combine the images, e.g. by averaging them and calculating a single result for the complete set of source images. The resulting les are stored in a subdirectory of the recording, and the directory gets the name of the used function. On this way we get an hierarchical order of recordings and processings. The Recording dialog can be used to process the images, but this is not described in this example. Please read the chapter on page 195 for a detailed description for online processing. In this example we have to close the Recording dialog with the Back button on the left of the tool bar and return to the Project Manager. Now we see a list of all recently created recordings. Please select a recording from in tree with a simple click. The rst image of this recording is loaded into DaVis and displayed in the movie window on the right side of the dialog. The so called Batch Processing of images is managed by a new dialog, which can be opened with the Batch button in the tool bar. Right on top of the dialog the last selected recording name is given as data source. The number of included image les is displayed, and a selected range of les can be entered. For this example we are processing the complete recording. 35

3 Getting Started

The upper right area of the dialog displays a list of processing functions, the operation list. Please click on the rst function and select the function group statistics and as operation the sum, average, rms, ... item. The storage mode should be set to default. Now click on the parameter item in the operation list and select, for this example, the items sum, average and rms.

Select the checkbox for Show result to display the temporary results (the sum) during the processing. Press the Start Processing button on the very left of the main dialog. The batch processing is executed and the remaining time is given in blue letters. When the processing has nished, the movie scroll bar can be used to switch between the three resulting images for sum, average and rms. The title of the movie box displays the name of the result.

36

4 Startup DaVis
4.1 Startup Window

After starting DaVis, the Startup window (see gure 4.1) appears on the screen. At rst DaVis reads some important macro les, then checks for a dongle, reads other (customer dependant) macro les and initializes the hardware. A progress bar gives information about the way to go. To stop the startup you can press the left mouse button somewhere on the startup screen. If the dongle is not detected and an error message is displayed, please follow the instructions on page 20. If the licence code does not correspond to the connected dongle, please read the section on page 43. At the end of the startup procedure, the DaVis main window is displayed and lls the complete screen.

Figure 4.1: The Startup Window of DaVis.

37

4 Startup DaVis

4.1.1

Start Options

When started from command shell or from a link on the desktop, some command line options can be given to DaVis. <filename>.IM7: The image or vector le is loaded at end of startup into consecutive buers 1,2,3,... to be used in DaVis Classic. <filename>.CL: The macro le is loaded at end of startup and an optional autostart macro is executed. <filename>.SET: The variables from this SET le are loaded at beginning of startup. No image or vector les are loaded. -nosplash: During startup a simple start dialog is displayed instead of the splash screen (gure 4.1). This is useful when running DaVis on Wine/Linux or when using a system with problems in displaying the splash screen.

4.2

Screen Layout

When the program is started, the DaVis task window is set up (see gure 4.2). This gure is an example for DaVis Classic, but the main items (menu, tool and status bar, dialogs) are visible in every package. The top line of the task window includes the programs name "DaVis 7 " on the left and the typical Windows title bar buttons on the very right: minimize, maximize or close the program. Menu Bar The rst object below the title bar of the task window is the Menu bar. When selecting one of the menus a pull-down menu appears which contains several functions. When moving the mouse cursor above the menu items, a short description about the function is displayed in the Status Text on bottom of the screen. For many menu items a so called Short Cut Key is dened. With a special key combination, e.g. CTRL+C to copy a screenshot to the clipboard, important functions can be reached easily without using the mouse. The keys are given right to the item text in the pulldown menu. The Tool bar provides buttons which allow execution of the most important functions with a single mouse click. When moving the mouse cursor above the toolbar buttons, a short description about the button function is displayed in the Status Text. The Status Text is positioned at the left of the Status Line and is used by lots of functions in DaVis to display temporary information. The small

Short Cut

Tool Bar

Status Line

38

4.2 Screen Layout

Figure 4.2: Layout of the DaVis main window in Classic style.

rectangle in the center displays a progress bar, which gives progress information during time intensive functions. The next and smallest rectangle of the Status Line gives information about the temperature of some cameras, if those cameras are connected, switched on and, of cause, are able to transfer the value to DaVis. The last three rectangles on the right display scaled or unscaled coordinates and image intensities when moving the mouse cursor above an image window. Scaled values by default and unscaled values when the shift key is pressed during the mouse movement. The largest part of the DaVis task window is the work area in the middle. Dependent on the layout style either the complete area is lled by a single Project dialog, or in the DaVis Classic layout (see chapter on page 273) different windows and dialogs can be positioned freely. For the rst help many of dialogs give so called Tool Tips whenever the mouse rests for a short time on a dialog item: A small window appears on screen, gives a description about the item, and disappears when the mouse is moved again. Tool Tips

39

4 Startup DaVis

4.2.1

The Help Menu

The online manuals for DaVis are created in PDF format and equal to the printed manual. The Acrobat Reader must be installed in version 4 or newer to view the les. When selecting a Help on item in the Help menu DaVis starts the Acrobat Reader with the selected help le and opens the contents page. The general manual about the DaVis Software and the programmers Command Language manual are available always in this menu. Depending on the customer licence some other manual may be added to this list, e.g. the PIV FlowMaster manual. This Window Whenever questions arise about a certain dialog or window, pressing the F1 key or selecting the This Window menu item immediately supports the user with online help. DaVis searches for the online help, the PDF le, in the help subdirectory and opens the le either on the contents page or in the chapter or section, which describes the active dialog. If a dialog includes dierent subdialogs, which are described in dierent parts of the manual, then a chapter selection box appears and asks the user to select the prefered chapter. Create Settings for LaVision Support Whenever a problem occures and the support at LaVision asks for the settings of DaVis, e.g. to check the parameters of a dialog or some hardware settings, this menu item should be selected to create a copy of all parameters (static variables) of DaVis. This SET le should be send by email to LaVision. Load Settings from LaVision Support Use this menu item to load a SET le from the LaVision support. After selecting the SET le DaVis restarts automatically to activate the new settings. The About Dialog On top of the About dialog the software version is displayed. The version number and the customer code in the third line (starting with a letter and four or ve digits) should be known whenever asking LaVision for support. 40

4.3 User Login

When pressing the lavision.de button DaVis starts your prefered internet browser and opens the LaVision homepage. Press button OK to close this dialog.

4.2.2

Busy Dialog

During extended calculations or other time intensive functions some information can be given to the user about the activity, e .g. an information in the status bar with a progress percentage. Some functions are using the dialog of gure 4.3 and display a text and a progress bar. This dialog includes a Stop button to break the function.

Figure 4.3: The Busy dialog

4.3

User Login

Sometimes a system is used by dierent people for dierent experiments. Those people like to use their own directories for images and results or even for the acquisition settings. E.g. one person is working on 2D PIV only, another one executes a 3D PIV project with the same hardware on the same PC. In DaVis 7 the user login is enabled by default to get dierent settings for every user and every project. Of cause one can install more than one version of DaVis on the same PC in dierent directories, so the dierent settings are realized by the directories. But it may be dicult to install update versions of the software or change some hardware devices, because one would have to change the "global settings" for each DaVis. If there is only one DaVis, a software update has to be done in one directory only. The "global settings" are stored in this directory, but every user can dene special settings and use his own directory structure. Another user function is the personal labbook: a log le, which can be edited in a special dialog. This labbok is stored as a text le in a user directory and is loaded again, if the user logs into the system the next time. There are macro functions to add text to the labbook, e.g. when starting an image acquisition 41

4 Startup DaVis

a line is added with the date, time and other information. The logging is done automatically by the project manager and batch processing dialogs. DaVis supports two user privileges: The "normal" privilege should be given to users who are not allowed to change the basic hardware settings. The "expert" user is able to change a lot of dierent settings and setup a complete project. It is possible to dene own menu and tool bars for this users, even user (or project) dependent menus and toolbars. The user login mode is selected by setting the variable DoUserLogin in macro le GlobalSettings.CL to value 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).

4.3.1

How to Login

If the user mode is enabled, DaVis shows the login dialog of gure 4.4 at the end of the startup procedure. The menu bar is restricted to the three items Login, Font and Help, and the toolbar is invisible. So all the user can execute in this moment is the login.

Figure 4.4: Dialog for User Login The Packages list displays all enabled software packages and projects. The enabling is managed by the dongle and the customer licence code. See the next section about how to change the package list. The user can select a login name, which must be dened by the DaVis administrator before. You dont need to be a system administrator to create a new user! The dialog remembers the last logged in user, which is displayed as default user at the next start of DaVis. The user can press the default button Login by the Enter key or by mouse. If a password is required (the adminstrator can enable the password mode), the user has to enter the password and press the OK button to log into the 42

4.3 User Login

software. Now all the user settings are loaded automatically, the menu and toolbar are displayed, the project manager may be opened, and the user can start working. At the end of the session the user has to logout via menu File Logout or shutdown DaVis via menu File Exit. The personal labbook of the user is available via menu File Personal Labbook. If the project manager is opened, the File menu is replaced by a Project menu.

4.3.2

Changing the List of Enabled Packages

The list of enabled software packages and projects is displayed in the User Login dialog (see gure 4.4). The available packages are dened by the connected dongle and the licence code. See chapter on page 20 for more information about dongles. Whenever a customer gets a new package from LaVision, there is no need to exchange the dongle. Together with the new package LaVision delivers a new licence code. This code must be loaded into DaVis. During a complete software installation the code is automatically loaded. During a software update or when the dongle is connected to another computer, the licence code can be loaded manually. Therefore the user has to log into DaVis as administrator (by default the password is lavision) and then select menu item Administration Load Licence Code. Note: Every dongle includes a unique serial number. Every licence code includes the same serial number. So a licence code can be used only in combination with one dongle. It is not possible to use a licence code with another dongle.

Loading a new Licence Key On some reasons a change of the licence code is needed: 1. Installation of a extended licence when upgrading a package (application) without re-installing the complete software. 2. Exchange of the dongle, e.g. after a hardware failure of this device. 3. Switching the same software installation between dierent packages with dierent licence keys. We would prefere a second installation of DaVis instead. 43

4 Startup DaVis

At rst store the SET le somewhere on harddisc when send from LaVision support by email. Select this le in a leselectbox. Next select the port, where you connected the dongle, in dialog 4.5. By default the dongle is located at the USB or parallel port at your local PC. A network dongle is located at some server in your company network. Leave the selection on search for the dongle, when DaVis should check the local ports and the network. Switch to local when the network should not be searched. Select network dongle to restrict the search to the network. In this case the IP address of the dongle server can be entered. Sometimes this is needed when DaVis does not detect the network dongle automatically. After pressing OK, DaVis loads the new licence code and restarts automatically. After restart the new packages are available.

Figure 4.5: Select the port or network address of your dongle.

Error on Wrong Licence Code If the licence code does not correspond to the serial number of the dongle, DaVis starts as evaluation version without packages and without hardware access. An error message is displayed which asks the user to get the correct licence code. Please use the customer settings disc with the same dongle number as the connected dongle. This number is individual for each dongle and stored in the dongle. During the startup the number is read from the dongle and copied into the variable DongleCreationDate.

4.3.3

User Administration

When the administrator logs into DaVis, the dialog of gure 4.6 opens. Special functions are available via button Global Options to enter general settings (see page 47) and the loading of a new Licence Code. At the end of the administration process the Logout button or menu item Administration Logout has to be pressed. 44

4.3 User Login

Figure 4.6: Dialog for User Administration

The administrator can dene the path to the user list. Here all general user information are stored, e.g. the login password, the login type (Classic or Project) and some default settings. A change of the path is useful when having dierent DaVis versions on the same PC, but wanting to use the same user list with same settings e.g. for the project path. By default the path is subdirectory User in the DaVis directory. Note: When changing the path, all user data has to be copied manually, or the users cannot log into the system any longer! With button Open Labbook the administrators labbook can be displayed. This labbook shows all login and logout messages, if the labbook switch is selected. To create a new user, press button New and enter the name of the new account. If you want to create a user with the same settings as another user, please select the other users name, then press button Copy to create the new user and use the settings of the other user. After pressing the Load button, some settings can be dened for the user. If wanted, the user can be deleted from DaVis. The user can change some individual settings when logged in, see next section.

The privileges are either Normal or Expert. Depending on a project some hardware settings, changes of the image acquisition or the execution of own macro commands may be allowed to an expert user only. 45

4 Startup DaVis

If selected, the user must enter the correct password to login. The password must be dened here and can not be changed by the user. The user can get an own labbook to log operations, e.g. image acquisition and batch jobs. If the classic mode is selected, the user can work with most dialogs known from DaVis 6 . If the mode is not selected, the user works with the single dialog project manager. See the chapter on projects on page 79 for further information. If the user logs in to the project mode, a project can be opened automatically. Press the left button to select a project, press the right button to disable the auto opening.

The administrator cannot change the le name of the user settings le, which is dened by the user name and stored in the userss directory. The administrator can select an Autologin user to be logged in immediately during the startup of the software. In this mode the Login dialog is skipped. To login as another user, you simply have to logout after startup and then use the Login dialog.

4.3.4

User Settings

After login, each user can change some individual settings via menu item User Settings in the File or Project menu. The dialog User Login Settings opens (see gure 4.7) and gives access to the password, usage of a labbook, selection of classic or project mode, and to the automatically opening of a project after login.

Figure 4.7: Dialog for User Login Settings

46

4.4 Personal Labbook

4.4
4.4.1

Personal Labbook
The labbook dialog

The personal labbook (gure 4.8) of the active user can be displayed via menu item File Personal Labbook. Press button Save to store the labbook as a text le in the user directory, press button Close to store the data and close the dialog, or press button Clear to delete all text lines.

Figure 4.8: Personal Labbook of a user

4.4.2

Macros for the Labbook

The following labbook programming functions can be used in own macros to store information about the executed functions. DaVis supports three dierent labbooks: the personal one, a labbook for each project (see the chapter about Projects on page 79) and the administrators labbook, which includes the logins and logouts. const int LABBOOK_PERSONAL = 0; const int LABBOOK_PROJECT = 1; const int LABBOOK_ADMIN = 2; int AddLineToLabbook (int theLabbook, string theText); int AddLineToLabbookTime (int theLabbook, string theText); These macros append theText to the given labbook. The second macro prepends the date and time before the text. If the labbook dialog is open, the text is updated and stored automatically.

4.5

Global Options

The Global Options dialog (gure 4.9) can be used to set general parameters. This dialog can be reached from the File menu in DaVis Classic and from 47

4 Startup DaVis

the Projects menu in most projects. In some projects one must be logged into DaVis as an expert user. When logged in as Administrator, the Global Options are available from the Administration menu and from the User Administration dialog. The dialog is designed with cards. Switch between the cards by clicking on a top row button.

Figure 4.9: Edit settings about le types in the Global Options dialog.

Buers Card The available number of image buers is set to 200 by default. This value can be increased if needed, but DaVis needs a restart to work with the new value. The special prole buer is internally stored in buer 0 and created with a maximum number of proles (20 by default) and a maximum prole length of 2048 pixel by default. Again DaVis needs a restart to work with new values. Statistical information are displayed in scaled or unscaled units: real world value, counts or pixel. Also this setting can be changed in the Statistics card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. By default DaVis asks for a save exit before shutting down. Then the user has to select if non-saved buers should be stored or if they should be destroyed. 48

4.5 Global Options

Export Card For the export of data via clipboard and for the storage of buer information in TXT les DaVis uses free values for the decimal point character (comma or dot) and the seperator (tabulator, space or carriage return character). The precision of oat values can be changed between 0 (no digits, like integer) and 15 (even very small values are exported in standard format and not in exponential format). The default value is 6 digits. DaVis supports dierent modes for copying window and dialog screenshots to the clipboard: Either take a screenshot of the complete window or dialog, including the titel bar and border lines, or copy the inner part of the window (client area) only. If mode always ask is selected, a dialog box appears before copying and asks for the desired mode. Image views and dialogs can be saved in dierent formats (BMP, PS and JPG) and in dierent modes: The rst mode saves a screenshot of the window on disk and needs the complete window inside the display. The result is equal to the copy and paste of DaVis windows into another program via shortcut Ctrl+C. The other modes are enlarging the window by the given factor in both directions. This is useful for vector images to get a better resolution of the vector arrows. But think about the resulting image size of massive enlarged bitmaps. For JPG exports the quality (in percent, 0 to 100) of this lossy format can be dened. Use lower quality to create smaller le sizes. Standard quality is 75 percent.

Files Card Before executing a macro DaVis always checks if a CL-macro le has changed and asks the user, if the changed le should be reloaded. This is the default mode. To load updated CL-les without asking select the checkbox. The number of indexed le digits is used for saving of a series of numbered (indexed) les or of a set. Select how many digits should be used in the lename when saving a series of image buers e.g. by the Batch Processing dialog.

Files Card in Classic Mode: The following options are available in DaVis Classic only and not used by projects: The default path for sets denes a main directory to store sets (see chapters on Sets and on Projects). All set information les *.SET will be stored here, all images will be stored in a subdirectory which name is equal to the set name. 49

4 Startup DaVis

Select the default le type for loading and storing of images and vector buers. This le types may change whenever the user opens a leselectbox and selects another le extension. There are several possibilities of preselected letypes to load by default: always use the type of the last load/storage action, use the default type for images or for vectors, select a set le or display all le types in the leselectbox. Filetypes Card DaVis internaly uses a 16 bit (WORD) or a oating point (FLOAT) resolution for images. When saving such an image in an 8 bit format such as BMP and TIFF, the resolution has to be mapped down to 256 intensity values. Select 0Max to store the most signicant information, otherwise select an 8-bit-range out of the 16 intensity bits. Mode image display uses the default image display attributes to calculate the range and the mapping from intensity to color palette. Select special formats for le types TIFF (8 or 16 bit resolution) and FITS (Intel or Macintosh format = order of the high and low byte of the 16 bit values). DaVis can read images from bitmap format BMP. These bitmaps include color intensities for each pixel, and the pixel color can be mapped into raw intensity values on dierent ways: Sum up the three color components red, green and blue. This creates more or less the average color intensity. Operate a conversion from color components into gray scale according to the spectral response of the human eye following the formula: counts = ( 299*R + 587*G +114*B ) / 4 Ignore the colors and use the palette index as intensity. Load the BMP-le into a RGB buer, e.g. to display the buer as a background image of a vector eld. Note: Most operations in DaVis are not allowed for RGB buers! For the import of raw image data les in formats RAW (8 bit) and RAWW (16 bit, see page 121) the buer size must be dened for width x, height y depth z and number of frames f.

In earlier version of DaVis, up to DaVis 7.1, this card included parameters about compression algorithm for the le formats IM7 and VC7. Since version 50

4.5 Global Options

7.2 these parameters can be found in the Storage Parameters device, see page 63.

Postscript Card Vector buers can be stored in postscript-format (letype PS), which is used as a vector format instead of all the bitmap formats described above. Images in vector format can be processed (e.g. streched) by programs like CorelDraw without losing information or producing a very bad look. The vectors can be stored with dierent looking arrowheads: no shaft exports the vector lines only, open shaft adds two lines for the shaft, closed shaft adds a third line for a closed triangular, scaled arrow scales a vector contour depending to the vector length, and lled arrow exports lled contours with constant width but free length. The arrowheads size can be calculated depending on the size of each vector (size proport. to length) or on the grid size (=equal for each vector) (size proport. to grid size). The line width of every vector line can be set in pixel, default value is 1 pixel for thin lines. If the vector display modes streamlines or strikelines are selected, the value interpolation factor is used to reduce the number of interpolation steps between two vectors (and therefore this value is responsible for lesize and accuracy). Default value is 8.0, values below 2 should not be used. If border rectangle is selected, a rectangle will be added to mark the image border. Note: The saving of vector buers in postscript format uses the default vector display attributes, so dont forget to press button As Default in dialog Data and Display Attributes: Vector (see page 143).

Print Card This card includes settings about the printing of images. When printing vector images the background may be printed as real background behind the vectors or seperated on a second page. The text information that will appear below the printed image or prole is editable by the user. The text may include CL variables which must be enclosed by % , e.g. %customer%. The following example gives the default parameter value for image text: 51

4 Startup DaVis

Camera 1: %CamList[CamListIndexInv[CamType[0]]]\n Serial number: %serial_number% and customer name \%customer%\

Screen Card The tabulator width of the Info-window is the number of space character printed into the window whenever a \t appears in an info string. This tabulators are useful to create tables of information. The width may be changed between 1 and 20 spaces, default value is 5 spaces. Tool tips on dialog items are displayed after a short delay. The mouse cursor must be positioned on a dialog item and then stay there without moving for a time. The time is given in tenth of seconds, the default value if 5 (= half a second). Value 0 disables the tool tip display. The DaVis toolbar can be painted with large or small bitmaps. By default large bitmaps are used. Select the mode for error displays between a simple message box (always displayed for errors during startup or shutdown) and a more comfortable dialog box with or without the complete error stack. When switched o, DaVis will break on errors but never display them. The minimum height of an image is the minimum number of rows of a image buer to be displayed as image. Smaller image buers are displayed in prole view.

Timings Card Some macros give information to the user for a short time, e.g. when selecting a rectangle with the mouse cursor. This duration of system message displays must be given in milliseconds or set to 0 for no message display. The triggered image acquisition needs a timeout to break the waiting loop, if no trigger is detected. This value is given in seconds and set to nine seconds by default.

4.6

Macro Menu

The Macro menu (see gure 4.10) supports the execution of DaVis functions via statements written in the Command Language (CL). This menu is available when logged in as Expert user only. 52

4.6 Macro Menu

For more information about macro programming and about all the functions in this macro menu please read the DaVis Command Language Manual. This manual describes the syntax of CL, lists all subroutines and lots of useful macros, describes the dialog development and more.

Figure 4.10: The Macro Menu Newly written macros have to be loaded rst with the function Load Macro File. The DaVis macro les are stored with extension CL. Loaded macros can be executed easily with two dierent items: Item Execute Function (hotkey CTRL+F7) opens a dialog with a list of all macro functions and system subroutines. The user can search for a macro name, select and executes that function. Item Execute Line asks the user to enter any CL statement via a command line (hotkey F7). Up to ten often used CL statements can be stored in the last section of the menu. They can easily be reached by hotkey CTRL+Shift+Number. Function Edit Macro File opens the Windows editor, in order to add or change macro les. Function Edit Dialog Box opens a simple dialog editor, a graphical interface for easily creation and positioning of dialog items. Very useful while writing macros is the function CL Variables (hotkey F6). It displays groups of variables, for example used to control a special device. Their present value is shown and can be changed. The programmer of new macro functions sometimes needs a Debugger to break a macro execution at dened positions, check variable values, or execute the macro step by step. The remaining four functions, the group in the center of the macro menu, operate a log-le and history of macro execution. 53

4 Startup DaVis

4.6.1

The Macro Log File

A useful tool for debugging purposes and for error descriptions is the macro log le. This le is stored in LOG.TXT in the DaVis directory and created at the start of DaVis. It can be read with every text editor. When enabled (click on menu item Log each CL command so the hook is displayed), DaVis writes all directly executed subroutines and system macros into the le. This includes all commands executed from the menu bar, tool bar and from buttons in dialogs. For some debugging purposes it may be useful to enable another mode, which stores ALL executed commands, including commands which are called by other commands. In mode Log each CL function call the macro execution takes a lot of time and causes a large log le. So this mode should be enabled only on special purposses by request of a LaVision software developer, and only for a short time! Make sure that this logging mode is switched o during normal DaVis execution. When sending an error report to LaVision, you should create a log le with the extended mode, add a textual error description and, in some cases, a screenshot of the software. With menu item Clear Log File the le LOG.TXT is deleted, and Show Log File starts the default text editor to display the le.

4.6.2

Example of a simple Macro Creation

This simple example explains how to write a new macro and start its execution. The example can be executed only in DaVis Classic or when the user is logged in with Expert privileges. At rst the programmer has to select menu item Edit Macro File, then enter the lename (e.g. USER.CL in the DaVis main directory) and click on the OK button Now the macro can be programmed in the Windows text editor. If available, an editor with syntax highlighting should be used, e.g. a C/C++ development software or the Context editor from the DaVis installation CD. Now the programmer has to dene a sequence of functions in the Command Language syntax. For example acquire 50 images and display them on screen: void Take_50Images () { int i; SetupAcquisition(); for (i=1; i=<50; i++) 54

4.6 Macro Menu

{ ExecuteAcquisition(i); Show(i); } EndAcquisition(); } After storing the new macro le (select File + Store in the editor), go back to DaVis and select Load Macro File in the macro menu. Choose the new macro le ( USER.CL ), and click on the OK button. The new macro will be loaded, hopefully without syntax errors. Then the macro can be executed via the function Execute Line or Execute Function. The execution is stopped by clicking on the STOP button, which is visible in the middle of the tool bar during the execution, or by pressing the ESCAPE key.

4.6.3

Error Dialog

If an error occures while running DaVis the dialog box of gure 4.11 appeares. The red text describes the error. Button Close closes the dialog. While the dialog is open, most functions of DaVis can not be used!

Figure 4.11: Small error dialog with last error message.

55

4 Startup DaVis

56

5 Hardware Setup
The Hardware Setup is used to setup all hardware components and their I/O or COM-ports. When working in project mode any active project must be closed. In the project selection screen please press the Setup button in the toolbar to open the dialog of gure 5.1.

The menu buttons can be used to open the Device Manager 5.1, the Device Parameter 5.2 or the Acquisition Timing 5.3 dialog.

5.1

Hardware Device Manager

The Hardware Device Manager dialog is used to setup all hardware components and their I/O or COM-ports. In DaVis Classic select menu item Devices General Hardware Setup.

Figure 5.1: Hardware Device Manager 57

5 Hardware Setup

All enabled hardware devices are shown in the treeview. Activating an item in the treeview will open the corresponding parameter card which can be used to change the settings (type, I/O-addresses) of the current device. All devices are displayed in a tree order, this means that the upper device (Recording) controlls all lower devices (e.g. the cameras, PTU, lasers ...). Additionally each device can get a number of subdevices: a camera can control an image itensier or an autofocus device. In this chapter the setup of a general camera is described. The Storage Parameters give access to general parameter settings included into a virtual device. The function of the device administration buttons is briey explained in table 5.1.

58

5.1 Hardware Device Manager

Icon

Description Add a new device to the tree. Remove the active device. Load a new hardware conguration from disk. Save the current hardware conguration to disk.

Initialize the current hardware conguration. Selecting the Devices item in the treeview will show the state of all devices in the right part of the dialog. Table 5.1: Device administration buttons.

5.1.1

Adding new Devices

When including a new device into the device tree, a master device must be selected before pressing the Add button in the top row of the device manager dialog. Then the dialogs of gure 5.2 opens and presents a list of available devices.

Figure 5.2: Add a new device to the Hardware Device Manager. After selecting a device from this list, a click onto the Add button includes the selected device into the tree of all devices at the recent position. So if you want to add one of the main devices (Camera, PTU, A/D converter) select the Devices item in the treeview rst. Then press the Add button and select the new device, which is included with the Add button below of the device list. The following chapter describes how to set up the specic devices. 59

5 Hardware Setup

5.1.2

Camera

Select the connected camera type from the list box. Choose the option test image, if no camera is connected, but general tests of the software should be possible. The test camera acquires artical images or just reads image les from harddisc. Some cameras are able to report their current temperature to the PC. In this case the value is received from the camera every ve seconds and displayed in the status bar. When using more than one camera with this feature, the temperature values are displayed after another (ve seconds camera 1, ve seconds camera two, ...). The temperature item becomes red when the camera is near the specic limit.

5.1.3

User Device

With the User Device it is possible to dene up to 10 user dened parameters. These parameters will be stored as image attributes during acquisition and can be used for further processings or to identify your images. You have to add this device to the Hardware Setup before you can use the parameters: Activate the Devices card in the treeview and press the Add button:

After adding the User Device to the hardware setup it is possible to dene how many parameters you want to use. After that press the Initialize button. 60

5.1 Hardware Device Manager

Now it is possible to change the parameter names in the Device Parameter dialog (See page 64):

The parameter values and corresponding units can be changed on the User Device card in the Device Settings dialog:

All parameters are stored as Device Data attributes during Take/Grab/Recording. Press the right mouse button on an image and select the Device Data card to see the stored parameter values: 61

5 Hardware Setup

Furthermore it is possible to use the user dened parameters in the Recording Sequence as a scan device with the following options: Fixed value: Only one scan position with the specied value for the parameter. User input: The user can enter a new parameter value before the next acquisition starts. Scan: Parameter scan between the specied Start and End values.

62

5.1 Hardware Device Manager

5.1.4

Device Data Analyser

Some devices, e.g. a A/D converter, acquire no images but proles of analog sources, e.g. energy or preassure. This so called Device Data are stored as attributes of the acquired images. For each device data additional information are given, like names and scales. See page 74 for detailed information and setup and display options. During processing of the camera images the data can be extracted to proles and later processed seperatly. Or the device data can be used for some type of image correction, or the interpreted data (e.g. average of a prole) can just be printed as overlay above the camera image. Simple functions of processing of device data can be executed and displayed on screen during image acquisition. This is done by the Device Data Analyser. Add this virtual device to the hardware setup, then the recording dialog will give access to online processing functions.

5.1.5

Storage Parameters

The Storage Parameters device of gure 5.3 is a virtual device for setting up special parameters of storing image and vector buers to les.

Figure 5.3: Setup general storage parameters and special parameters for fast online storage.

Compression Algorithms Since DaVis 7 the software supports a number of dierent compression algorithms for the le formats IM7 and VC7. More information on the formats are given on page 117. 63

5 Hardware Setup

The default compression algorithm can be set to uncompressed, fastest storage, smallest size or to a dened algorithm: uncompressed (like IMG in DaVis 6 ), simple compression (like IMX in DaVis 6 ), or zlib (known from the gzip compression program). When selecting fastest, the algorithm is automatically selected to get a very fast storage. When selecting smallest, the algorithm is selected to get a very small le size. In both cases and especially for the fastest storage the selection depends on the buer type and may even change between same buer types. Dierent types of compression can be selected for 16 bit WORD buers and for oating point buers (FLOAT, double and vectors). For the storage of results of Batch Processing a special compression is used. E.g. the general WORD compression should be a fast algorithm to increase the speed of image processing, while the storage of processed les should create small les. Fast Online Storage For most cameras a special acquisition mode can be used to acquire the images with the maximum frame rate and store them images online on harddisc. In this mode the number of images to acquire is only restricted by the size of the harddisc and not by the much smaller size of the PCs memory. The bottom area of the dialog includes the parameters for this fast acquisition and storage mode. Details about this parameters, about the hardware requirements and the general usage of this mode are given on page 209.

5.2

Device Parameter

After initializing the hardware this dialog shows a list of available device parameters which depends on the current hardware. With this dialog it is possible to redene the names for some parameters:

The Reset button sets the parameter names back to their default values. All parameters are scannable and can be used in the Table scan acquisition item (see page 204). 64

5.3 Acquisition Timing

5.3

Acquisition Timing

This dialog shows the current Acquisition Timing le which is automatically set during the DaVis installation. Normally it is not necessary to change this le.

65

5 Hardware Setup

66

6 Device Settings
The Device Settings dialog of gure 6.1 is used to change the settings of the installed devices (e.g. cameras, laser). The dialog can be opened from menu Devices General Hardware Setup in DaVis Classic or from several dialogs of a project, e.g. the Recording dialog.

Figure 6.1: Dialog for device settings, here the general camera settings for the Test Image camera. All enabled hardware devices are shown in the treeview. Activating an item in the treeview will open the corresponding parameter card which can be used to change the settings of the current device. All devices are displayed in a tree order, e.g. the PTU as the master device and all cameras on the same level below of the PTU. This means that the upper device (the master, e.g. the PTU) controls all lower devices (e.g. the cameras).

6.0.1

Camera

The following example is given for the Test Image camera, but most descripions are valid for all cameras. See the hardware manual of your camera for descriptions of special parameter cards. In the dialog of gure 6.1 the area of interest (AOI) on the CCD eld, the binning during the readout of the CCD and actions after the image acquisition 67

6 Device Settings

can be dened. For FlowMaster cameras and PIV applications the camera parameters should not to be changed from their default values. Operating mode: The TestImage camera supports the following modes: ramp: ramp with intensities as sum of x- and y-pixel-position. ramp with noise: ramp with a small additionl random noise. double ramp: image with two frames, each of standard ramp type. 8 bit ramp: with special (packed) buers using 8 bit per pixel. random particles: Single or double frame image with random particles, see special camera parameter card Random Particles. les: reading of external les as series of dierent test images. information text: included in the image as test for frames, macro exec: Execution of a CL command during each image acquisition. See special camera parameter card Macro. virtual frames: for buers with a very large virtual frame size but with a physical size of one frame. This single frame is lled e.g. by a camera whenever the user or the program needs to get data from a frame of this buer. Area Of Interest (AOI): With the coordinates x1, y1, x2, y2 an AOI is dened, which can be equal or smaller than the size of the CCD chip. Reducing the AOI reduces the acquisition time for some cameras and lowers the memory required to store the images. In order to resize the AOI to normal size (full CCD), click on the Max button. A click on the Set button allows the selection of a rectangle for a certain AOI inside the last activated image window. Caution: Using a reduced AOI can be dangerous as a possible laser reection on an area outside the chosen AOI may not be noticed. For PIV we recommend to use maximum size of the chip anyway. Binning: Binning means to sum up the counts of a specied number of pixel and read as one intensity of an enlarged pixel. There is a dierence between software and hardware binning: While hardware binning sums up the counts before digitization of the image and benets a higher sensitivity, the software binning sums up the counts after digitalization and creates a higher dynamic range. It is possible to set binning factors separately in the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) direction depending of 68

the used camera. Only certain cameras support hardware binning. Notice: When binning is used the spatial resolution decreases. Accurate PIV measurement requires the highest possible resolution and so binning should be switched o for PIV! External Trigger: This checkbox indicates whether the camera is running with internal rate generation or if it is triggered externally. In a PIV system the camera is triggered by the PTU (the only exception is the single frame / single exposure mode). The use of an external trigger is determined by the settings on the Trigger card. Postprocessing: The camera image can be manipulated after transfer to computer memory. This action concerns only the manner in which images are stored and not the reading procedure of the camera itself. The operation modes can be selected on the Image Transformation and Intensity correction card.

6.0.2

Scales

On the card of gure 6.2 the horizontal X-scale, vertical Y-Scale and intensity I-scale are dened for a camera. Each camera possesses its own scales. All scales map X/Y/I are using the equation x = ax + b, where x is the original position (or intensity) in units of pixels (or counts) and x is the new scale value, a is the factor and b is the oset. The default setting are a = 1 for the factor and b = 0 for the oset. The camera overlay include drawing information, e.g. marked areas or additional texts, which are painted above the image. This overlays are copied into the destination buer during image acquisition. Press button Edit to open the Overlay Editor (see page 265).

6.0.3

Image Transformation

The way in which the CCD image is transferred to the image buer can be set in dierent modes in the card of gure 6.3. The transformation is kind of a postprocessing between camera readout and display or storage in DaVis. Example: For a given experimental setup, all acquired images appear upside down. If vertical mirror is chosen, they appear in the "correct" way. These actions need quite a while. We advise to use these functions only if absolutely necessary. The following image transformation options are available: 69

6 Device Settings

Figure 6.2: Setup the camera scaling.

Figure 6.3: Setup the camera transformation, which is executed during the image acquisition. Frame Splitting: Can be used to split a single camera frame in two virtual frames of the same size. The mode determines what part is taken for 1st and 2nd frame, e.g. mode bottom-top saves bottom half in frame 1 and top half in frame 2. Available modes are o, left-right, right-left, bottom-top, top-bottom. No Action: The image is not changed (default). Flip axes (xy): The image is mirrored on the rst diagonal. The result is an image with exchanged x and y axis. Rotate 90 anticlockwise: The image is rotated to the left by 90 (useful if camera is mounted rotated). Rotate 90 clockwise: The image is rotated to the right by 90 (useful if camera is mounted rotated). 70

 Vertical mirror: Applies a vertical mirror. Horizontal mirror: Applies a horizontal mirror. Rotate 180 : Rotates the image by 180 . Flip axes (-xy): The image is mirrored on the second diagonal (from lower left to upper right). The result is an image with exchanged x and y axis. If binned: enlarge to original size: When binning is used during image acquisition the acquired image is enlarged to the maximum chip size. Image correction: Image correction is applied to all images during acquisition. The corresponding mapping function can be loaded using the Calibration dialog. See ?? for a short instruction or the Imaging Tools manual for a detailed description.

6.0.4

Intensity Correction

The Intensity Correction card (see gure 6.4) can be used for dark image, white image and background subtraction.

Figure 6.4: Setup the camera intensity correction, which is executed during the image acquisition.

Dark Image Subtraction: CCD cameras have a dark current in the order of a few counts. When the camera lens is capped and no light reaches the detector the dark image is measured. This oset is present in all images. The dark current is a function of the temperature of the CCD-chip and is decreased drastically by cooling the chip. These changes 71

6 Device Settings

can be in the range of 10 counts. If an image consisting of this dark current is taken it can be eliminated using the automatic background subtraction. It is advisable to take a new dark image directly before performing a new measurement series. White Image Subtraction: In case the 2D intensity distribution of a homogeneously light emitting object is not at the 2D detection eciency can be corrected by acquiring an image of a homogeneously illuminated object (e.g. white paper or milky glass table). The white image subtraction can only be done when dark image subtraction is activated. It is performed via division of each acquired image with the normalized correction image. Background Subtraction: Let us assume, e.g. a Laser Induced Fluorescence (LIF) experiment. Apart from the desired uorescence signal, a Rayleigh-signal might be present (depending on the used lter). But as you want to detect a uorescence image, we can consider the dark current and Rayleigh signal as undesired background. In this case acquire a Rayleigh image (LIF-experiment conditions without uorescence molecules) as background. Now the dark current and the Rayleigh-signal are automatically subtracted from each acquired image. Correction on device data value: Each camera intensity can be corrected on a device data value, read from a device data source. See section about device data on page 74. All available sources are selectable in the list, or the correction can be switched o. When using this intensity correction, a reference value must be dened to execute the following function on the camera image: I1 (x,y) = I(x,y) / I(Value) * I(Reference)

Using the corresponding Take button you may Take an average over N images. Additionally you may Subtract an oset of N counts for dark and background images.

6.0.5

Image Area Data

The setup of an image area for the usage as device data is described on page 76 in the section about device data acquisition. 72

6.0.6

Random Particles

This parameter card (see gure 6.5) can be used to change the settings of the Random Particle Test Image mode. This mode is often used to create artical PIV images for testing the vector calculation algorithms.

Figure 6.5: Setup the test image camera for random particles mode, a PIV simulation. The following Random modes are available: noise: Single frame image with a random noise. single particles: Single frame image with random particles. double exposure: Double frame image with random particles. The shift of the particles between the rst and the second frame is dened by the equation in the lower part of the dialog. The background noise level is the maximum value for an oset added randomized to each pixel. The three items in the center of the parameter card are dening the size, intensity and density of artical particles. The last group of parameters denes a function for particle movement between rst and second frame of a double exposure image.

6.0.7

Macro Camera

This parameter card (see gure 6.6) can be used to load or create camera images. Just enter a macro command, which has to create or load an image into the buer given by theBuffer. If the camera index (1...6) is needed, variable theCamera can be used. A detailed description about writing macro code can be found in the Command Language Manual. 73

6 Device Settings

Figure 6.6: Setup the test image camera to load or create the image via macro code.

6.1

Device Data

A number of devices can be used to readout additional data during the image acquisition: the A/D converter, some energy devices connected by the serial COM port (e.g. some laser types or Power Meters) and a camera with light guide connection. Another example is the LaVision Online Energy Monitor with USB connection. For all devices, which can be used to acquire those data, a Device Channel Setup card is available in the Device Manager. Depending on the device dierent parameters can be set up to dene the way to readout the data or to change the data scaling. During the acquisition the device data value or a complete time resolved data scan is stored in the image buer as buer attribute. Details on the naming conventions of this attributes and on the usage with own macro functions are given in the Command Language manual. The data can be displayed in special dialogs, e.g. the Device Online Display (see page 75), in the Device Data card of the Data and Display Properties dialog (see page 76) or in the Recording dialog as special item to be selected in the Window Manager (see page 195).

6.1.1

Image Correction on Device Data

The devices trace can be used for an image correction, either immediately after the image acquisition or later during postprocessing. In most cases the average value of the trace is used to calculate the correction factor. For all used devices a reference value should be dened for two purposes: The Device Online Display uses the reference to display a bar of the averaged 74

6.1 Device Data

trace intensity, and the Image Correction needs this value as a factor of the correction function I1 (x,y) = I(x,y) / I(Value) * I(Reference) The Image Correction can be executed automatically at the end of each image acquisition, or later from the Device Data dialog or by a postprocessing function in the batch operations dialog. When using more than one camera or a camera in double exposure mode, the device data must be applied to a camera and image. The correction is calculated for this image only. On this way dierent correction values can be used for dierent cameras. Of cause a device can be applied to all cameras at once.

6.1.2

Device Data Online Display

The example in gure 6.7 shows the Device Online Display dialog with two data values read out from image areas, e.g. from installed light guide devices. The item in the middle displays the data value, the right bar presents the same value in the range between 0 and two times of the reference value. This dialog is refreshed after every image aquisition and should not be used for time critical acquisition setups. The display can be enabled in the Recording dialog (see page 195). Four display modes are available: The averaged device value of each used source and the device name are displayed in every mode. An additional bar (see example below) or a trace (prole) can be added. The trace can either be displayed in a small prole in the same line as the davive name, or in a large prole below of the device name to ll up the complete online display dialog. The last two modes are useful for devices with real traces of a size above 1, e.g. an A/D converter.

Figure 6.7: Device data online display

6.1.3

Setup of Device Data Sources

The Device Manager includes special cards for a number of devices to setup the parameters for device data acquisition. 75

6 Device Settings

Device Data from a Cameras Image Area

Figure 6.8: Setup of camera image areas as device data. Sometimes an analog device is connected via light guide to a camera image. The area of the light spot can be dened by a rectangular region (see gure 6.8) and is given by the pixel coordinates of the upper left (x0,y0) and lower right corner (x1,y1), the so called AOI = area of interest. Press button Set to dene the region with the mouse (click left mouse on both positions) in the camera image window. Press button Show to mark the rectangles in the camera image window with dierent colors and to calculate the device data value (the average intensity of the region) in the active camera buer. The values are displayed right to the Set button. The online display needs a reference value to scale the bars of intensity levels. This reference value must be given in the rightmost item for each channel.

Laser Energy The laser energy is read using a RS232 connection. This feature is not available for all laser types!

6.1.4

Display of Device Data Data

The Device Data card is part of the Data and Display Attributes dialog (see gure 6.9) and displays all buer attributes concerning device data in a readable form. On top of the dialog a device data source must be selected. The list includes the names of all stored devices. The dialog displays the trace of the selected source in a prole using a minmax range for the intensity. Moving the mouse cursor above the prole, the intensity and the time of the subjacent pixel are displayed in the coordinate area of the status line. 76

6.1 Device Data

Figure 6.9: Display of device data information. The average, root mean square (rms), minimum and maximum of the trace are calculated and displayed either in scaled or unscaled values, depending on the setting in dialog Global Options. The trace can be copied into the prole buer with button Display Trace As Prole) for further operations in DaVis Classic. If a device data source is applied to an image frame (a single image of one camera), the number of this frame is shown as Image/Frame, or shown as independent for a stand alone source. All applied channels can be used for an image correction, which may have been done during the image acquisition, or which can be done manually be pressing button Correction.

77

6 Device Settings

78

7 The Project
The DaVis project concept supports the user in execution, administration and evaluation of data. Therefore, all system parameters, user annotations and experimental results will be stored in a hierarchically le structure. Depending on the software package the project provides a number of subdialogs for acquisition and evaluation of data.

Project
Properties
Date, comments and all fixed system parameters, i.e. camera calibration incl. calibration images

Dataset

- 1-n datafiles - date, comments - recording or evaluation parameters - 1-n datafiles - date, comments - recording or evaluation parameters

Evaluation

Dataset

Dataset

- 1-n datafiles - date, comments - recording or evaluation parameters - 1-n datafiles - date, comments - recording or evaluation parameters - 1-n datafiles - date, comments - recording or evaluation parameters

Evaluation

Dataset

Evaluation

Dataset

Figure 7.1: The project concept.

7.1

The Project Manager

The Project Manager dialog appears after the startup of DaVis. It is the central dialog where data acquisition, data evaluation and data storage is organized. 79

7 The Project

The dialog is divided in three parts: The treeview in the left area of the dialog shows the le structure of the system (all supported DaVis les) and can be used as a le browser. Browsing through all drives is possible, browsing through the network is not allowed. The data viewer in the right part shows the current le of the treeview and the cards in the lower left part give some additional information about the previewed le or the current project:

Info: General system information. See chapter on the Info Text Window on page 277.

User labbook: An own labbook for each user which is automatically stored on the harddisk in the DaVis User subdirectory.

Project labbook: This labbook is available after opening a project. It can be used to store additional information about the current experiment (e.g. hardware environment). All important events (e.g. image calibration) are stored automatically.

Properties: This card shows the properties of the current le in the treeview depending on the le type (single le, dataset, folder...). The 80

7.1 The Project Manager

following dialog shows the properties of a dataset:

The Comment can be used to store additional information about the dataset. The Batch jobs eld shows the name and date of all Batch Operations which have been applied to this dataset. Press button Edit to change the text. The function of the buttons and icons in the treeview is briey explained in table 7.2 and 7.1. Icon Description The MyProjects folder Floppy drive Harddisk CD-Rom Network drive Project Dataset: Properties. data, . . . Consists of settings, calibration

Dataset: Image recording. Consists of n recorded images Dataset: Image. Consists of n image les Dataset: Vector. Consists of n vector les Dataset: Prole. Consists of n prole les
continued on next page. . .

81

7 The Project

Icon Description Table 7.1: Icons in the Project Manager treeview.

Table 7.2 lists the menu buttons which are used for experiment administration. The commands of the buttons can also be reached by clicking with the right mouse button on an item in the treeview. Button Description Create a new project in the MyProjects folder Open the selected project Copy the selected project Move the selected project Delete the selected project Add and remove hardware, acquisition timing Add, remove and adjust implemented hardware Change acquisition timing Stops the execution of a function Go back to the previous dialog Table 7.2: Administration Buttons in the Project Manager.

The MyProjects folder: This is the working directory for new projects. Select this item in the treeview and press the Properties lecard to show the path of this folder. To change the path please execute the following steps: Change the path of the MyProjects folder: Navigate to the desired folder in the treeview, then click onto the folder with the right mouse button and select item Set as MyProjects. 82

7.2 About Projects

Create a new project: Press button New to open the following dialog:

Specify the name and the type of the new project. After pressing the Ok button the new project will be created in the MyProjects folder. Open project: Select a project in the treeview and press button Open. Close the active project: Press button Close. Copy / Move a project: Select a project in the treeview and press button Copy (or Move in case you opened the dialog in the mode Move). This button will open the following dialog:

The title of the dialog shows the source of the operation. Now choose the destination path in the treeview and press the button Copy or Move to start the operation. Delete project: Select a project in the treeview and press the button Delete. Caution: The project and all data in the subdirectories will be lost! They are not moved to the Recyclie Bin!

7.2

About Projects

After opening a project the treeview of the manager shows only the data within this project. All system parameter, user annotations and experimental results 83

7 The Project

will be stored in a hierarchical le structure (as outlined in gure 7.2). This example shows a project Prj_Type=PIV_Date_Time that includes two recordings Cam_Date_Time_1 and Cam_Date_Time_2. The datasets of the calculated velocity elds PIV_Vec and a postprocessed vector eld PostProc are stored in their respective subfolders.

Figure 7.2: Project example. Most of the subdialogs you will see in your project are directly accessible in the project manager by clicking the project name or a data set with the right mouse button. Depending on the type of dataset (image buer, vector buer, properties, . . . ) dierent options may be available on the context menu that then opens. Clicking on the project name provides operations to import data, make new recordings or (re)calibrate the cameras, clicking on data sets lets you execute image processing or evaluation routines. The data type (e.g. images, vectors, proles) restricts the available processing routines further to a subset of operations. So if you miss a dialog you could access before it might be that the operation is simply not available for the type of data to be processed currently. Furthermore additional DaVis software packages may add extra dialogs that are not included in the current package. The following list shows some of the default options of the Set context menu: Batch Processing: Opens the Batch Processing dialog to evaluate the active Set. Redo last calculation: The Batch Processing stores the parameters of the last calculation in the result Set. The Redo last calculation option opens the Batch Processing dialog with these parameters and the corresponding source Set. Hyperloop dialog (see page 99). Export data (see page 93). Move the active Set within the current project. Delete the active Set. 84

7.2 About Projects

Rename the active Set. The project (sub)dialogs can be divided in four groups. The rst three groups correspond to the natural workow of a project (i.e. experimental setup, data acquisition, calculating results). The last group contains general dialogs, that appear throughout the experiment: The property dialogs (e.g. camera calibration, import data). These dialogs are common to all projects. Scaling the camera is necessary for the further evaluation. Spatial calibration of the camera might be necessary if either you are not viewing perpendicular to the object, but want information about an oblique object plane or if you use a lens with a small focal distance and thus have image distortion across the image. In multi camera setups this is obligatory. The image recording dialog is used to record a new sequence of images. Here you set up your image acquisition parameters (exposure time, number of images, images/second etc). Please see page 195 and the Recording chapter for a detailed description. The image evaluation dialogs help to analyze the images or the results of previous calculation steps. They will be described in the Batchprocessing chapter on page 219 concerning the image and vector evaluations. The table below lists the menu buttons which are used for the project management. The commands of the buttons can also be executed by clicking with the right mouse button on an item of the treeview. Button Description Close the current project Import data to the project. See chapter Import Data on page 88. Shows a dialog for image recording. See chapter New Recording on page 195. Calibrate the camera images. See chapter Import Data on page 88. Evaluate the data interactively
continued on next page. . .

85

7 The Project

Button

Description Evaluate the data in a batch process. See chapter Batch Processing on page 219. Export data from the project. See chapter Export Data on page 93. Stops the execution of a function

Create a mask from the active image Table 7.3: Buttons in the Project Manager.

Some key shortcuts are available to the advanced user to work on the low level data structure of recordings or processed SETs: Press the keys Shift, Ctrl, Alt and E to open the Windows Explorer at the directory of the selected SET, or press the the control keys with S to open the SET le in a text editor.

7.3

Create a new project with existing data

First choose a data source le in the treeview (*.set, *.imx, *.tif, ...). Click with the right mouse button on the selected source and select Create new project in the popup menu. Then specify name and type of the new project. When the new project is created, the selected data will be imported into the project.

7.4

Data Viewer

The Data Viewer dialog can be used to animate recorded or processed datasets. The functions of the dialog are described in the table 7.4. 86

7.5 Window Manager

Button

Description Step one image backwards. Plays the movie backward to the rst image. Plays the movie forward to the last image, and then backward to the rst one. Plays the movie forward to the last image. Step one image forward. Stops the playback. Note: The movie can also be stopped by hitting the spacebar. When this button is turned on the playback is repeated until the user stops it. This is like an endless loop. Set actual image as rst image of the movie.

Set actual image as last image of the movie. Table 7.4: Data Viewer control buttons.

7.5

Window Manager

The Window Manager is available in several dialogs and may be used for image display conguration. It is subdivided into an area of n m images and a small conguration dialog, for example: 87

7 The Project

A suitable array of images (vertical horizontal) may be selected using the Layout textbox within the range 1 1 up to n m (depending on the current dialog). The button may be used to optimize the resolution of the CLUT for all button may be used to visible windows, it sets the color to 0 . . . max. The maximize the size for all visible windows. With a click on an image the corresponding image slot is highlighted, i.e. the headline of the active image becomes blue. The image type that is displayed at this position may be selected using the radiobuttons in the Window Manager. The size of the images can be changed by pressing the left mouse button on the small slider between the images. A double click on these slider will center the slider.

7.6

Import Data

The Import dialog is reached using the Import button in the Project Manager. With this dialog you have the possibility to import datasets or les to the current project. Note: the les will be copied.

88

7.6 Import Data

The dialog is divided into 3 parts: The upper left part with the folder treeview, the preview in the right part and the lower left part with the Import list and some additional import options. At rst the user has to choose the location of the les to be imported. This can be done in the treeview where the complete folder structure of the system is displayed (Importing directly from the network is not possible). After that please select one of the following Import modes: Selected les: This mode shows all supported les in the le list. Select all les you want to import as one SET (by holding the CTRL or SHIFT key) and press the Add to list button. Note: *.set and *.avi les cannot be combined with single les and will be added as an extra item. Numbered les: Import les with a name in style < pref ix >< number >< f reetext > . < ext > The le names have to start with the same prex characters, followed by a number. All les of this style and found in the selected directory are imported in the order of the numbers. Select one le from the list and press the Add to list button. multi frame images: Use this mode to import single les as multi frame images. The format of the les must be: < pref ix >< number >< f rame > . < ext > The le names have to start with the same prex characters, followed by a number. The < f rame > part identies the dierent frames. folder (recursive): Import a complete folder structure. Each item of the Import list represents one new dataset in the project after the import process. Activating an item in the treeview will show some of the following import options: Range and Increment: Select the range and increment of the les you want to import. This option is available for Sets, Avi and numbered les. Import subdirectories: Only available for Sets. If you select this option all datasets in the subdirectories will be imported. Color mapping (BMP,JPG,AVI): The color mapping of the les, in most cases RGB color images, can be selected between three modes: simply average the three color components into an intensity value, convert the color into an intensity value via a function, which uses dierent factors for each component and rescues the gray level of each pixel, 89

7 The Project

import real RGB buers, which is useful for background images, but not for calculations. Number of frames/Frame ..: Only available for multi frame les.

Choose the number of frames and the corresponding frame wildcards.

The following options are valid for all items in the Import list and can be found on the Main settings card:

Execute Batch Processing: Use the Batch Processing to prepare all les before importing to the active project (add necessary attributes, scales..). See page 90 for further details. Import to folder: All imported les will be copied to this folder.

The Import data button in the lower part of the dialog starts the import process.

7.6.1

Execute Batch Processing

Usually the le format of imported data delivers the intensity information of the images without any further information. File formats like *.bmp or *.tif can not transport information about scaling, number of frames or delays during image acquisition that may be necessary for further evaluation. Images that have been acquired with a LaVision systems and saved in DaVis le formats may include these details. In order to prepare the images for the evaluation it can be necessary to apply a suitable list of batch operations to the images. After enabling the Execute Batch Processing checkbox you can press the Parameter button to open the Batch Processing dialog. Now you can dene an operation list or load one of the predened import operation lists. Find several examples in the following paragraphs. 90

7.6 Import Data

7.6.2

Sequence of single-frame Images

t+Dt

t+2Dt

t+3Dt

This example assumes that the les that need to be imported are single-frame images and the images need to be prepared for a correlation. The correlation will be done between successive les. First of all the images need to be imported using the Import dialog. Select Import mode selected les or numbered les. The time delay t between successive recordings needs to be declared using the Add time between images textbox in the Import options. The value has to be entered in [ms]. This will write the times to the AcqTimeSeries0 attribute. During correlation DaVis will calculate the dierence between these values to determine the time delay, e.g. t=AcqTimeSeries0(image#2)-AcqTimeSeries0(image#1). In a second step a scaling from [pixel] to [mm] needs to be transfered to the images via BatchProcessing. The scaling can be transfered for example from camera#1 if the camera has been scaled with a suitable reference image in the Calibration dialog before. A corresponding operation pipeline would look like this: F()1 Group: attributes Operation: set scales from camera Parameter: Camera = Cam1

7.6.3

Sequence of double-frame Images

t t+Dt

1a

t t+Dt

2a

t t+Dt

3a

t t+Dt

4a

1b

2b

3b

4b

This example assumes that the les that need to be imported include two frames and the images need to be prepared for a correlation. The correlation will be done between the frames of each le. First of all the images need to be imported using the Import dialog. Select Import mode multi frame images and specify the frame extension (e.g. 91

7 The Project

frame#0=a, frame#1=b). As the time delay between two double-frame images is usually not of interest no Import options need to be activated. After the import some information need to be added to the images to prepare them for the evaluation. This can be done via BatchProcessing. The scaling from [pixel] to [mm] needs to be transfered to the images. This scaling can be transfered for example from camera#1 if the camera has been scaled with a suitable reference image in the Calibration dialog before. Finally the information about the timing has to be added to the image attributes. The delay between the recordings of dierent frames is extracted as the dierence of the arrival time of each frame. This is t=AcqTime1-AcqTime0 while AcqTime0 is the arrival time of frame#0 and AcqTime1 is the arrival time of frame#1. Typically you set AcqTime0=0 and AcqTime1=t to the delay t between both frames. The values need to be entered in [s]. A corresponding operation pipeline would look like this: F()1 Group: copy and reorganize Operation: reorganize frames Parameter: Num. of frames = 2 Group: attributes Operation: set scales from camera Parameter: Camera = Cam1 Group: attributes Operation: add Parameter: Add Attribute: AcqTime0 = 0 s Group: attributes Operation: add Parameter: Add Attribute: AcqTime1 = t s

F()2

F()3

F()4

7.6.4

Sequence of double-frame Images in single Files

1a

1b

2a

2b

t t+Dt
92

1a

t t+Dt

2a

1b

2b

7.7 Export Data

This example assumes that the les that need to be imported are single les that have to be combined to double-frame images. These images need to be prepared for a correlation. The correlation will be done between the frames of each le. First of all the images need to be imported using the Import dialog. Select Import mode selected les or numbered les. As the time delay between two double-frame images is usually not of interest no Import options need to be activated. After the import some information need to be added to the images to prepare them for the evaluation. The procedure is similar to the example in the previous paragraph. The information on the number of frames is already available. Using the BatchProcessing a scaling needs to be transferred, e.g. from camera#1 that has been scaled with a suitable image before. And the information on the time delay t between both frames have to be added to the attributes AcqTime0 and AcqTime1. The values need to be entered in [s]. A corresponding operation pipeline would look like this:

F()1

F()2

F()3

Group: attributes Operation: set scales from camera Parameter: Camera = Cam1 Group: attributes Operation: add Parameter: Add Attribute: AcqTime0 = 0 s Group: attributes Operation: add Parameter: Add Attribute: AcqTime1 = t s

7.7

Export Data

The Export Data dialog can be used to export data from the current project to several formats like avi, bmp and jpg. Activate the dataset to be exported and press the Export button in the Project Manager toolbar. 93

7 The Project

The dialog provides two general export modes: Standard (single) Set export: This is the default export mode. The active Set can be exported in several formats (avi, dat, txt). Make sure that the window manager in the upper left part of the dialog is set to 1x1. Advanced multi Set export: This advanced mode can be used to export several Sets in one Avi, Bmp or Jpg le. It is described in chapter Multi Set Export on page 96. The Start, End and Inc settings can be used to dene the data range to be exported. The standard Set export supports the following export types: Movie (AVI): This mode creates an avi le using the selected Compression mode. Depending on the Compression it is possible to dene the Quality which can be used to decrease the size of the movie. The available Compression modes are no compression and Microsoft Video 1 (not the best, but installed on all systems). Mode Select in dialog opens a dialog with a list of all installed compression types, but there is no guarantee that the selected type is able to work without problems on the generated bitmaps. This has to be tested before by simple export of e.g. one image of the SET. If it is working ne, then the mode has to be selected once during the run time of DaVis. Later the mode can be used by changing to use last dialog settings. 94

7.7 Export Data

Use the Enlarged bitmap factor to increase the size of the images and dene the speed of the movie with Frames/s. Note: The standard Microsoft Windows AVI player is not able to play AVI les with a dierent speed. BMP,JPG,PNG: Exports each le of the source dataset to the folder specied in Filename. Mode: Select between same as display which exports the window using the current zoom factor and complete buer which ignores any zoom factor. Enlarge bitmap factor: This mode enlarges the window by the given factor in both directions. This is useful for vector images to get a better resolution of the vector arrows. But think about the resulting image size of massive enlarged bitmaps. If DaVis detects problems during export because of a very large bitmap size, then a dialog is displayed to ask the user, if the export should be tried anyway or if the export should be canceled. When the user wants to export anyway, the warning dialog will not be displayed again during runtime of DaVis. Quality (only JPG): The quality of the resulting les can be dened as a value between 1 and 100. For more information about this value please refer to the JPG denition. A quality of 100 percent is not lossless and a value of 33 percent does not create a le with a size of one third of a lossless le. A very good value is 75 percent. TIF: Exports each le of the source dataset to the folder speced in Filename. DAT(Tecplot),PS,PRF,NC(NetCDF): Exports each le of the source dataset to the folder speced in Filename. TXT: Exports the intensity values to a txt le. If the source is a multi-frame vector eld it creates one txt le for each frame. LaVision DaVis 6 dataset (SET): This mode can be used to export a dataset in the DaVis 6 dataset format (imx or vec les). LaVision DaVis 7 dataset (SET): This mode can be used to export a dataset in the DaVis 7 dataset format (im7 or vc7 les). After choosing the export type and the corresponding parameters you have to specify the store settings: 95

7 The Project

Export path: Allows to specify the path for the exported data. Press the folder button on the right to select the path in a leselectbox.

Filename: Choose between default and specify:.

default: Creates a default export name using the complete path within the current project.

specify: Enter a user dened export name. If is possible to use parameter wildcards in the format: %ParName%. This will be replaced by the name of the parameter and the corresponding value of the source lename, for example: Source lename: .../mytestproject/Cam_Angle=120 Specied name: MyExport_%Angle% Export lename: .../MyExport_Angle=120

Create parameter wildcards: Create an export name using all available parameters of the source dataset.

Export: Press this button to export all selected les to the specied destination.

7.7.1

Multi Set Export

The multi Set export is an advanced mode of the export dialog. It can be used to export several Sets in one avi, bmp or jpg le, for example 2 Sets, side by side: 96

7.7 Export Data

At rst you have to choose the number of views using the window manager controls in the upper left area of the dialog. For example 2x1 (2 views, side by side) or 1x2 (2 views, one upon the other). The Active Window item group in the left part of the dialog shows the settings of the active window (marked with a blue headline) in the right part. The Active Window can be changed by selecting another window with the left mouse button. With this it is possible to change the settings of each window: Active Window: Source Set Use this option to show the source Set in the active window. Start, End, Inc: Specify the data range you want to export. These settings aects the preview slider below which can be used to show only the images of the selected range. Hide controls: Show/hide the control buttons of the active window. Active Window: Specify Set Show a user dened Set in this window: Search: Use the Open button to select a Set within the current project or enter directly the name. It is possible to use wildcards (* or ?) and/or les relative to the source le, for example: 97

7 The Project

./Vec* : Search for Vec* in the subdirectory of the source Set. ../Vec* : Search for Vec* in the same directory of the source Set. ../../Vec* : Search for Vec* in the upper directory of the source Set. Found: The name of the Set. Start: Start the export with this index. Repeat: Repeat each le n times (default = 0 : no repeat). Inc: File increment for this Set. Hide controls: Show/hide the control buttons of the active window. See the examples below to understand how the multi Set export works:

7.7.2

Hyperloop

The Export dialog is able to export an arbitrary number of datasets with one mouse click. This can be done using the Hyperloop dialog (see page 99). In this case the dialog provides the following additional options: Use full data range for all datasets: Use this option to export the full data range of all selected datasets. This is a very useful option if the number of les diers between the selected datasets. 98

7.8 Hyperloop

Export all: The button exports all selected datasets.

7.8

Hyperloop

The Hyperloop dialog is used to execute an operation for an arbitrary number of datasets of the same type and hierarchy level within the project. The dialog can be reached by pressing the right mouse button on a dataset. The displayed popup menu provides the following options: Hyperloop All Sets: Select all Sets within the project and open the Hyperloop dialog. Hyperloop Current folder: Select only the Sets of the current folder. Hyperloop Root folder: ... : This option can be used to specify a parent root folder. All Sets below this folder will be selected.

The dialog is divided into the following parts: 1. Available datasets: This box shows all available datasets. Use the buttons Add and Add all to append one or more datasets to the Selected datasets. 99

7 The Project

Show data path: Show the complete path of the datasets within the current experiment (on/o). 2. Filter: Use the lter to add/remove datasets to/from the Selected datasets. This can be very useful if you want to process datasets with specic name characteristics. Filter: Choose the lter type Parameter or Dataset name. Parameter: This lter uses parameters which are coded in the dataset names. The parameter must have the format: ..._<PARAMETER>=<VALUE>_... for example: CamImages_StageX=110_PivDt=3 This dataset name contains the following parameter: StageX = 110 , PivDt = 3

The Name item contains all parameters which are found in the Available datasets. Dataset name: This lter uses wildcards to lter the datasets, for example: CamAngle=*PivDt=*

Add lter: Add the ltered datasets to the Selected datasets. Remove lter: Remove the ltered datasets from the Selected datasets. 3. Selected datasets: Remove: Remove one or several datasets from the Selected datasets. Remove all: Remove all sets from the Selected datasets. 4. Operation: The available operations depend on the current project type. Press the Execute button to start the selected operation for all selected datasets. Some standard operations are: 100

7.9 Reorganize

Batch Processing: Execute all selected datasets with the current Batch Processing operations. Press button Parameter to change the Batch Processing settings (see chapter on page 219). Reorganize data: Reorganize the data of the selected Sets in one/several new Sets. Press button Parameter to change the Reorganize settings. Delete: Delete all selected datasets and subdirectories. Move: Press the Parameter button to choose between: Move to: Move selected Sets to the specied location. Move n level up: Move each Set to an upper directory level Attention: Make sure that there are no Sets with the same name. Export: Export all selected datasets. Press button Parameter to change the Export settings. See chapter Export on page 93. Rename: Press the Parameter button to choose between: New name: Enter a new name for all Sets. Replace substring: Replace a substring in all Sets with a new one. Attention: Make sure that there are no Sets with the same name.

7.9

Reorganize

The Reorganize dialog can be reached from the Hyperloop dialog (see page 99). It can be used to copy data from an arbitrary number of source Sets and save it in certain order in one or several new Sets. For example: A user wants to create one Set with the average images of several source Sets:

The result Set Average_10-15 consists of 6 average les for the 6 angles. At rst you have to specify the source Sets using the Hyperloop dialog (see page 99). Click with the right mouse button on a Set in the project treeview and choose Hyperloop - All Sets (all Sets of this hierarchy level). 101

7 The Project

This will open the Hyperloop dialog:

Now you have to specify the Sets you want to reorganize (selected Sets) using the Filter and the Add/Remove buttons. Then select operation Reorganize and press the Parameter button to open the dialog: 102

7.9 Reorganize

The Reorganize dialog works as follows: The user has to dene one le in the rst Set. This le is copied from all selected Sets to one new Set (Source: 10 Sets - Result: 1 Set with 10 les). The les will be sorted by the variable parameter in ascending order (if parameter available in the format: ..._<PARAMETER>=<VALUE>_...).

Available les: This box shows all les in the rst Set. Select the le you want to extract from each Set. Note: Only one le can be selected. Selected le: Shows the name of the le which is copied to the result Set. Ignore variable parameter: Specify the nonrelevevant parameter which must not be used for the reorganisation (for example: Date, Time). Select variable parameter: Specify the main variable parameter which. Path: Select the path of the result Set. Use for default set name: Choose for each constant parameter if you want to use it for the default Set name. Name: Specify the name of the result Set. 103

7 The Project

The reorganisation can be started with the Execute button in the Hyperloop dialog (press BACK in the toolbar). If more than 1 variable parameter is available, for example a scan over 2 translation axis, you have to specify one main variable which will be varied in each result Set. Example Source: Scan with 2 translation axis, X-axis: 50-60, Y-axis: 10-12 Reorganize: Variable parameter: X-axis

Result: 3 Sets (one for each Y-axis position) with 6 les (for each X-axis position: 50,52,54,56,58,60).

104

8 Data Buers
8.1 About Buers

DaVis is designed for the acquisition and processing of data from CCD and video cameras. A CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or CMOS (Complementary M etal-OxideSilicon) is a 2-dimensional image sensor. It consists of an array of separated image elements, so-called pixels. The whole set of intensities, pixel by pixel, builds up the image. An image or prole is (in DaVis) internally stored in a block of main memory, called a Buer, including all pixel in a 2-dimensional array and some additional information like scales and comments. The image buers are either of the type WORD (16 bit, integer values 0-65535), FLOAT (32 bit, oating point) or DOUBLE (64 bit, oating point), Other buer types are available for color images (32 bit RGB, 8 bit for each color component red, green and blue) and for vector data (two or three oats: Vx, Vy and Vz). A buer is displayed on the screen in an Image Window, which is a view of the raw data and can be of the types image, spreadsheet, prole or 3-D. The loading and saving of image buers in les can be performed in dierent ways: Either by using the project manager, e.g. the movie display or the batch processing, or by using functions in the File menu in DaVis Classic: Load, File Browser and Save .

8.1.1

Buer Properties, Attributes and Scales

Every buer contains the properties size, format and scales. Other information include a comment and the acquisition time. When storing the buer, the scales, comments and the time are all stored as well. It is possible to store an unlimited number of free information (strings, arrays), the so called attributes. These can be used by the customer or macro programmer for own desire, while the standard properties (and some special attributes) are dened and handled by LaVisions projects. A list of used attributes is given in the appendix of the Command Language Manual. 105

8 Data Buers

8.2

Buer Properties

The Buer Properties are displayed in the Data and Display Properties dialog (gure 8.1). This can be opened in most cases by a click with the right mouse button onto an image window and then selecting the Display Attributes item. Other items in the popup menu may lead directly to a special card of the dialog: properties, scales, attributes and statistics. Other ways to open this dialog are the Window menu or a Display Attributes button near the image window in dialogs. In DaVis Classic the toolbar button and menu Buer Properties can be used. The buttons As Default and To All have no function when opening a card from the Properties tree. This buttons are useful for image display cards only.

8.2.1

General Buer Properties

The Properties card displays the main properties of a buer: size, type, components, acquisition time and a comment string. It is possible to resize the buer in DaVis Classic, change its data type or lock/unlock it.

Figure 8.1: Buer Properties card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. The meaning of the displayed information are: Name of the active image or vector buer Size in pixel of horizontal and vertical direction, depth and frames (X, Y, Z and F) 106

8.2 Buer Properties

Format WORD (16 bit integer number), FLOAT (32 bit oating point), DOUBLE (64 bit oating point), a vector format (two or three oats: Vx, Vy and Vz) or a RGB color format (32 bit RGB, 8 bit for each color component red, green and blue). Locked when the hook is visible inside the small box. This is a safe way to prevent accidental data destruction in DaVis Classic. The program is allowed to read data from the buer, but not to write any data in this buer. Unlock the image buer by clicking again. Grid size is displayed for vector buers only. Mask is attached to the buer. The mask information are used by some processing functions and can be displayed on screen e.g. to disable unmasked pixel or vectors. Components are additional information for each pixel or vector. By default each pixel has one information only, the intensity. Some processing functions are calculating additional information, e.g. for vector buers with height information. The number of components and the name list are given. Time and date of the last buer storage is given. The creation time (e.g. during image acquisition) is given with an additional millisecond value. Comment: Users comments stored in the buer, e.g. for a history or description of the data.

8.2.2

Changing the buer size or format

Changing the size of the active buer is very easy in DaVis Classic: Simply enter the new width, height, depth or frame number and then press button Resize. No other buttons or items of this dialog will change the buer size, not even the Apply button or the Enter key! For some buer types a changing of the format is possible with the help of the button right of the format item: Simple image buers can be converted from oat to word or from word to oat without loss of any data, but of cause with rounded values tted into the new range. Complex vector formats can be changed to simple vector formats. RGB colored buers can be converted to oating point values by summing up the three color components. 107

8 Data Buers

8.2.3

Creating a new buer

If the Properties dialog is opened for an empty buer in DaVis Classic, the size and format can be dened to create a new buer. Therefore the size items must be lled with the desired values. If width and height are lled but depth and frame size are not touched, their values are automatically changed to one plane and one frame. The Enter key or the Apply button may not be pressed before all items are lled! After setting the image format and pressing the Apply button the buer is created and lled with intensity 0.

8.3

Buer Scales

A scale is a linear mapping of the X (horizontal), Y (vertical), Z (depth, used for real 3D buers only) or I (intensity)-axis to a new range of values. Scales can be assigned to an image buer or predened for each camera (see chapter on camera setup). The linear scaling function for real intensity value I to scaled value Is uses a factor a and an oset b: Is = I a + b

8.3.1

Default Scales

The default scales for the axis X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) are the pixel locations on the CCD: e.g. for a FlowMaster 3 ranging from 0 to 1023 for X and from 0 to 1023 for Y. The I-scale corresponds to the intensity values (counts ) as a default. For a WORD buer it ranges, e.g., from 0 to 65535 counts. Values are always available in the default scales: Press and hold the SHIFT key and move the mouse cursor inside the image window. The pixels coordinate and intensity is given on the bottom right in the status bar in pixels and counts.

8.3.2

Buer Scales

Each buer has its own set of scales. They are a property of that particular buer and are stored with it. When a buer is loaded from a le, the image buer obtains these previously dened scales automatically. Every frame of a multi frame image window can get its own scale, which overwrites the default scale and is used instead e.g. by the image display when moving the mouse. The scale of the rst frame is used as default scale for the complete buer. Since DaVis 7.1 all scales are stored as buer attributes 108

8.3 Buer Scales

with name prex FrameScaleX, where X represents the frame number starting with 0 for the rst frame. The name frame scale should not be mixed with the scale of the frame axis .

8.3.3

Prole Scales

Whenever a prole is taken from an image buer, the scales of the buer are transferred to the prole scales. This means, that the previous scales of the proles are overwritten by the new ones.

8.3.4

Camera Scales

For each camera the user can dene Camera Scales. The way to dene this is described in the chapter about Camera Setup of the General Device Manager and in the chapter about Calibration. The advantage is that all images acquired with a camera automatically obtain these predened camera scales. So, if several images are taken with the same setup, it is very useful to have dened camera scales in advance.

8.3.5

Change Buer Scales

In order to change buer scales please open the dialog Data and Display Properties as explained above and select the Scales item (see gure 8.2).

Figure 8.2: Buer Scales card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. In this dialog the scaling parameter can be dened manually for the active buer. Press a Default button to set all parameters of this scale to the default values (e.g. factor=1, oset=0, units=pixel, label=empty for the X-, Y- and Z-Scale). 109

8 Data Buers

The scaling information can be changed either from the default scale (select Buer Scale in the Scales of Frame list) or for a selected frame.

8.3.6

Scales and CL-Operations

In case buers with dierent scales are used in the same operation (e.g. B3 = B2 - B1 in DaVis Classic) the scales of the buer mentioned rst (here B2) are transferred to the new buer (here B3). Whenever a column, row or pixel is addressed and when operations with proles are performed, no scales are taken into account at all. The only exception is taking the prole from a buer. In this case the scales of the buer are transferred to the prole scales. All subroutines concerning statistics calculate the results according to the recent Intensity scale (the positions of max and min are returned in the default scales).

8.4

Buer Statistics

To display buer statistics please open the dialog Data and Display Properties as explained above and select the Statistics item (see gure 8.3). Another way to open the dialog is in DaVis Classic via the toolbar button and via menu Rectangles Statistics.

Figure 8.3: Buer Statistics card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. 110

8.4 Buer Statistics

Statistics are computed in the selected data range from the active image buer. For special buers with ags to validate individual pixel only the valid pixel are taking into account. The data range can either be a rectangle or the entire image/frame. After selecting a rectangle, the button SetRect can be pressed to dene the area in the buer window by mouse clicks. The coordinates of the selected rectangle are given in the top line of the dialog in a blue font. The statistics calculation is either done for the complete buer or for a single frame. When selecting the complete buer, a rectangle, larger than the image frame size, is not cut o at the frame border: A multi-frame buer is used as a single large buer with all frames stacked in the height direction. When selecting all frames, e.g frames 0-3 for a buer with four frames, the statistics are calculated of all frames with the same rectangle (relative to the upper left corner of every frame). When selecting a single frame, the rectangle is cut down inside the available area, so no neighbour frame is used for statistic calculation. The statistics can be shown in scaled or unscaled units (switch scaled). When selecting scaled statistics, then the scaling information of each frame are taken into account. For buers with dierent units on the frames, the statistic results may be senseless when working on the complete buer. Press button Export to InfoText to write the statistics into the Info Text window, where the text can be marked and copied to other programs. The following statistics are available for image buers: Sum of all pixel intensities in the selected area Average value of all pixel intensities RMS (Root Mean Square, see below) Maximum intensity with its pixel location Minimum intensity with its pixel location

8.4.1

Root Mean Square (RMS)

There are two dierent ways to compute the Root Mean Square (RMS): Statistics can be calculated on a single image, where each pixel has a dierent intensity. Then the average intensity and the rms based on the complete image is calculated. The results are scalar values. This is the standard deviation from each pixel intensity from the mean intensity. 111

8 Data Buers

The second way works with a number of images: Average and deviation are calculated for each pixel position separatly. The result is either an averaged image or an image of deviation results at each pixel position. Therefore the algorithm needs to determine for each position the average and deviation. There are two dierent options to execute the rms calculation. The rst options needs two loops: At rst average all images, at second calculate the rms, which needs the average to sum up the dierences. The following formular gives the standard deviation of n images with term xi representing the pixel intensity 1 of any pixel of image i and x = n n xi being the average: i=1

1 n1

(xi x)2
i

(8.1)

Implementing this formular with two loops creates a time consuming algorithm, especially when the images can not be hold in PC memory, and each image must be loaded from harddisc for two times. A second way is possible, which needs one loop only! The following formular can be used to calculate the RMS of a complete image with one loop. Again xi represents a pixel of image number i from n images in total.

rms =

2 i xi

xj )2

n(n 1)

(8.2)

With the following term transformation we can proove, that both formulars give the same result: 112

8.4 Buer Statistics

1 n1 1 n1

(xi x)2
i

(8.3)

= = = = = = =

(x2 2xi x + x2 ) i
i

(8.4) (8.5) (8.6) (8.7) (8.8) (8.9) (8.10) (8.11)

1 (x2 2x1 x + x2 + ... + x2 2xn x + x2 ) n n1 1 1 ( x2 2(x1 + ... + xn )x + nx2 ) i n1 1 ( x2 2nxx + nx2 ) i n1 1 x2 nx2 ) ( i n1 1 ( n1 n x2 i ( xi )2 ) n

x2 ( xi )2 i n(n 1)

= rms

8.4.2

RMS on vector buers

For vector buers the average, RMS, minimum and maximum are given for each direction (X, Y, Z) and in total. The total RMS rmsTotal is calculated as Rt = RMS in X-direction.
2 2 2 Rx + Ry + Rz with Rx as

8.4.3

Histogram

The Histogram dialog (see gure 8.4) creates a histogram of a complete image or of a rectangular region of an image. A rectangle can be dened by mouse after clicking the SetRect button. The histogram prole is created when pressing the Create button. It is scaled as number of pixels with the same intensity vs. intensity in counts. The given intensity range of the source buer (use 0-0 for minimum to maximum) is devided into the given number of slots. With the Display button, some parameters of the prole display can be changed, e.g. the displayed range. See page 184 for descriptions of the available display modes, but only a restricted set of modes can be selected for the histogram prole. 113

8 Data Buers

Figure 8.4: Histogram card of the Data and Display Properties dialog.

8.5

Buer Attributes

This dialog can be opened from item Properties Buer Attributes in the Data and Display Properties dialog. The card of gure 8.5 presents a list of all attributes, which are dened for the active buer. Attributes are additional information (strings and arrays) of the buer and often set by the image and analog data acquisition functions. A list of used attributes is given in the appendix to the Command Language Manual.

Figure 8.5: Buer Attributes card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. 114

8.5 Buer Attributes

Select an attribute in the list on top of the dialog. The list can be displayed unsorted, sorted by the name, sorted by frame index or restricted to all attributes which name includes a substring. The frame mode is useful for multiframe buers with a large number of attributes for each frame. The list is by default sorted alphabetically, but the user can invert the sorting order. The next line gives the type of the selected attribute. This can be a string or an array of oat, integer (32 bit) or word (16 bit) values. For arrays the number of elements is displayed at the end of the type item. Very long string attributes are not displayed with their total size, the display is restricted to the rst 1000 characters. To view the complete string, you can swap into the Edit mode. It is possible to change the value of a string attribute, but this should be handled with care because of the syntax of some attributes, e.g. the buer overlay in attribute Overlay. To change the value, please press the Edit button, then change the text in the large rectangular edit box. If the edit mode is enabled, the name of button Edit changes to Undo, so all changes can be destroyed by pressing the Undo button. Accept the changes by pressing either the Apply button or by selecting another attribute. Press button Refresh in DaVis Classic to rescan the attribute list from the buer, e.g. after acquiring a new image into the buer. This dialog is not refreshed automatically after changes of the buer because of timing problems during image acquisition.

8.5.1

Create new string attributes

Use button Delete to remove the selected attribute from the buer. Pressing button New Attribute opens the modal dialog box of gure 8.6, where the name of a new attribute and its value can be entered (only string type, no arrays). Press button Create to accept the new attribute or Cancel to break the creation and close the dialog.

8.5.2

Additional dialogs for attributes

Often there are lots of attributes dened for a buer. E.g. the analog and energy data acquisition creates more than ten dierent attributes. To understand the meaning of all this attributes DaVis includes dierent additional dialogs, which present the data in an easily readable form and gives more information or possibilities to analyse the data. Therefore the attributes can be grouped by the system. 115

8 Data Buers

Figure 8.6: Create a new buer attribute of type string and set its value. If the viewed buer includes such data groups, the tree view of the Data and Display Properties dialog gets some sub-items below the Properties Buer Attributes item. Examples can be seen in gure 8.5: the items Energy (to be displayed in the Device Data Dialog, see page 76) and FrameInfo (see next section). Click on this items to display the corresponding group dialog.

8.5.3

Buer Frame Information

The dialog in gure 8.7 can be opened from the Properties Buer Attributes FrameInfo item in the Data and Display Properties dialog. It displays all attributes with information about a single frame of the selected buer. This informations are created by the image acquisition functions of the project recording dialog and by the internal subroutine TakeImage. They are very useful when using more than one camera or a camera running in double exposure mode. Select the frame with the item in the rst line of this dialog. The next item to the right gives the optional name of this frame, which can be displayed in the title bar of the image window. The camera name describes the camera, which acquired this frame. The rst digit denes the number of the camera (1..6), the next character can be a letter and optionally denes the frame number of a multi exposure camera (A for the rst exposure, B for second exposure). After the colon follows the real camera name. The next two lines give the pixel size of the used camera and the exposure time for this frame. If the image has been acquired in a time series, the time dierence between the rst image of the series and this image is given. For multi exposure cameras every frame is acquired at a dierent time, and the 116

8.6 File Formats

Figure 8.7: Additional information about buer frames.

time dierence of the selected frame to the rst frame is given as acq. time in buer. In normal cases the frame size is equal to the buer width and height. When acquiring images with a number of cameras with dierent CCD sizes, then the resulting buer has the width and height of the maximum camera size. Therefore the real size of the camera image is displayed here. In DaVis Classic a button Copy to buer can be pressed to create a buer with the real camera size and copy the frame data into this buer. If the frame has its own scale, the dened frame scales are marked. The processing ags notice the actions executed immediately after the image acquisition: background subtraction, image rotation (or ipping) and image correction. In DaVis Classic button Refresh must be pressed to reload the attributes after changing the buer contents, e.g. when acquiring a new image into this buer.

8.6

File Formats

DaVis supports the input and output of the following data formats. The standard formats are IM7, IMX, IMG, VC7, VEC and PRF, which are the only formats to include the complete buer information dened by the image acquisition functions and by the calculation functions of DaVis. If a buer is saved in a dierent le format, some information is lost! 117

8 Data Buers

The standard formats are supported by the Batch Processing dialog and by the Project Manager. Foreign images of other formats must be imported into DaVis.

8.6.1
IM7

DaVis Filetypes for Images and Vectors

This is the default storage format for all types of image buers. All buer information are included in this le type. The data can be compressed, and the compression mode can be selected in the Global Options dialog. Dierent compression algorithms are implemented for a short storage time or to get a small le size. Algorithms are for example the dierence encoding of IMX or the zlib algorithm, known from the gzip program. For the fast online storage (see page 209) a special 16 to 12 bit algorithm simply reduces 16 bit Word buers to 75 percent of their size by bitshift operations. The setting is stored in variable DefaultIM7PackType, which can be changed by CL programmers. All available modes are dened as constant values IM7_PACKTYPE_x. Note: DaVis 7 stores the standard formats with a special version ag and additional information, so this les can not be read with older version of the software! Choose IMX if you want to use the data with older DaVis versions. IMX This is the default format for image buers up to DaVis 6 . For WORD buers the data is compressed; FLOAT buers are always stored uncompressed, no matter if the extension is IMX or IMG. The data compression scheme is very fast and ecient. Therefore, there is no reason to avoid the compressed format, unless you like to use your own software for data analysis. On the LaVision homepage a C-code is available to read IMX, IMG and VEC le formats. IMG Used by software version up to DaVis 6 for uncompressed data storage. After a header of 256 bytes, the data is stored in binary format (not ASCII) line by line from the top left to the bottom right of the buer as unsigned integers (2 bytes each pixel, 0-65535) or, for FLOAT buers, as single precision oating point numbers (4 bytes each pixel). 118

8.6 File Formats

The raw data table is followed by a coded list of the buer attributes (strings and arrays), scales and the comment. VC7 This is the default storage format for vector buers, including the complete buer information. The format is very much equal to IM7 and the data compression can be used. Note: DaVis 7 stores the standard formats with a special version ag and additional information, so this les can not be read with older version of the software! VEC Used by software version up to DaVis 6 for vector data.

8.6.2
TXT

General Filetypes for Export and Import

It is possible to store and load the contents of an image or vector buer in the ASCII text format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). No comments will be stored. Some parameters of the export can be dened in card Export of the Global Options dialog: The decimal point character can be switched between comma and dot, the seperator between values can be changed between tabulator, space character and carriage return, and the precision of exported oat values can be changed between 0 and 15 digits. Programmers are using the variables ExportChars and ExportFloatPrecision. BMP There is also a data transfer support for bitmaps. Images can be loaded in the Windows bitmap format BMP (in 16, 256, 65536 or full colors) with the help of the File menu (it is the same way as for IMX or IMG). Alternatively, it is possible to store bitmaps with the help of the clipboard as described on page 188. DaVis only supports storing image buers in the 8 bit format. This means to loose lower signicant bits. Dont use BMP to save images acquired by a camera, which supports more than 8 bits, if you want to use the high resolution data for later computing! The BMP format does not support storing attributes, scales and comments. 119

8 Data Buers

When loading BMP les in DaVis buers, a conversion mode is used, which can be selected in the Global Options dialog (see page 50). B16 A 16-bit bitmap format, which supports long comments, but no attributes. JPEG The Joint Pictures Experts Group format is lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. The JPEG writing and storing algorithms in DaVis are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. For more information see ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz PNG The Portable Network Graphics format can be used to store RGB color images and 16 bit grayscale images. TIFF Tagged Image File Format is an uncompressed 8- or 16-bit color format and does not store comment lines or other attributes. DaVis can import grey and color (RGB) TIFF images, and starting with DaVis 7.1 color palette images. Exported TIFFs are grey images only. DaVis does not support compressed TIFF images. Please import uncompressed les only. FITS The Flexible Image Transport System stores comment lines. The variable FitsByteOrder is set to for the standard FitsByte order (MacIntosh like) or to 1 for the IntelByte order. DAT The DAT format is used e.g. by Tecplot. DaVis is able to create data les for Tecplot of multi plane and multi frame buers, both image and vector type. NetCDF The Network Common Data Form is used in PIV-Net and dened by Unidata (see http://www.unidata.ucar.edu). The extension of this le format is NC. 120

8.6 File Formats

PS (PostScript) Vector buers can be stored in postscript-format, which is used as a vector format instead of all the bitmap formats described above. Images in vector format can be processed (e.g. streched) by programs like CorelDraw without losing information or producing a very bad looking view. See the section on Postscript Options (page 51) for further possibilities of this format. Note: Storing a buer in postscript format will save the vectors only! If you want to save the additional information like the background image and scales, you have to save the window (e.g. via right mouse button on the vector window). The program CorelDraw is not able to load a postscript le as a new sheet. You have to open an empty new sheet and then import the postscript le. AVI Audio-Video Interleaved movies can be imported into buers or converted into letypes IMG and IMX. During import the color tables (RGB) can be mapped into grayscale pixel values. Warning: DaVis restricts import of AVI les to 1 GB lesize. If you want to import frames from larger AVIs, please split the le into smaller parts. Otherwise an AVI movie can be created from image display movies, which is described on page 290. RAW and RAWW The 8 bit RAW and 16 bit RAWW image data formats are created by some external image acquisition programs. Row per row and from left to right in each row the pixel data are stored without additional information. The image size (width, height, depth and frames) must be entered in the Global Options dialog in card Filetypes (see page 47), because the size is not specied in the le itself. When DaVis stores such a le, all planes and frames are stored.

8.6.3
PRF

Special Filetypes for Proles, Sets and Overlays

A single prole is stored in an ASCII le format. This prole format is the only le format to be loaded into the Prole window (see page 180). In the rst line the number of data points and the scale value of the rst and last point are stored. The data points follow line by line. 121

8 Data Buers

PRM One or more proles are stored in an ASCII le format. This format can be read e.g. by Microsoft Excel. Each prole is stored in a dierent column. A column gives the scaled values of the prole.

SET DaVis uses SETs to store parameters and data les as single objects . For example all acquisition parameters and the acquired images are stored as a SET. Most dialogs are supporting the SET structure to make the usage of large numbers of les easier, e.g. the movie player and of cause the Batch Processing and the Project manager, both are based on a SET structure. With the help of SETs the user does not need to care about the location of parameter les and about the image les. The dialogs only ask for a SET as input and another SET as output, and then the dialogs manage the SET creation and le storage automatically. The SET le itself is a simple ASCII text le and lists all static CL-variables of the included groups of variables. Additionally this le can include a comment string, the storage time and a type ag, which is used e.g. by Projects. A subdirectory with the same name as the SET le includes the image, vector or prole les: MyExperiment.set MyExperiment/B01.imx MyExperiment/B02.imx MyExperiment/... MyExperiment/B17.imx In this example we have a SET with the name MyExperiment, and the SET includes 17 image les of type IMX.

OVG The OVG les dont include any image information, but overlay graphics. This graphics can be edited in the Overlay Editor, see page 265 for more information. The overlays of a complete buer, of a single frame or of a range of frames can be stored in OVG les and reloaded. Whenever the Project Manager displays a SET of OVG les, the manager searched for a source image and displays the image together with the overlay. 122

8.6 File Formats

8.6.4

Reading DaVis Filetypes with other Software

The DaVis letypes IM7, IMX, IMG, VC7 and VEC can be read from other software like MatLab, LabView and own C/C++ programs. A ReadIMX.DLL can be downloaded from the LaVision homepage. The complete source code of this DLL is available in C-language and can be compiled on Windows and Linux systems. The DLL includes functions to be called from LabView or own C/C++ programs to read image and vector data and the attributes. Examples for LabView and in C-code are available. For MatLab a special DLL can be called from some example M-les. The source code of this ReadIMX-Matlab.DLL is not avaiable.

123

8 Data Buers

124

9 Image and Vector Display

9.1 Image and Vector Windows and View Types

Windows or so called views display the contents of a buer on screen. The display can either be an own window (resizable and with title bar) in DaVis Classic or the display can be embedded into a dialog, which is regularly used in DaVis projects. A number of dierent view types are available: a simple 2D image display, a simple 2D vector display with optional background information, a 2D multi frame display with equaly displayed 2D images to compare information of dierent buer frames, a spreadsheet view with a table of pixel intensities, a prole view, a simple 3D view with the intensity as height information, and some 3D (OpenGL) view types with real 3D information. All those view types are based on a common mapping function, which calculates a color for each pixel intensity. The color is taken from the selected Palettes and Color LookUp Tables and from a user selected gamma value. The mapping function is taken from user settings about the intensity range. In most views the user can zoom into the display and move the viewpoint by scrollbars. Clicking with the right mouse button into a view opens a context menu, where dierent items lead to parameter dialogs or other functions. Most common are the Data and Dialog Properties dialog about buer information and to setup the display, changing of the view type or opening of a view of another type, storing the buer or exporting the display to a le or clipboard as a screenshot.

Active View While many image windows can be placed on top of each other or side by side, there is only one image window known as the active one. It has got the so-called input focus and is marked by the blue title bar in DaVis Classic or by a title with blue background in the Project dialogs. Unless a function is explicitly declared to work on all windows, each function applies only to the active image window. For example, changing the resolu125

9 Image and Vector Display

tion or zoom factor from the menu bar or from a tool bar button only aects the active image window. Activate an image window by either clicking inside this window with the mouse or, in DaVis Classic, clicking on its entry in the buer list. A window can be activated by a function e.g. to ask the user for an input when dening rectangles. Open an Image Window When opening an image window the contents of a certain buer are displayed. This is, of course, only possible for buers which already exist. A buer is activated and displayed in a window in DaVis Classic by selecting menu Buer View (view type) or by clicking on its entry in the Buer List. In the Project Manager a buer is displayed by selecting a SET of les and then selecting a buer of this SET. For all other dialogs please refere to the Project and System Manual. Optionally modify the display with the function Display Attributes in the Window Menu or click the right mouse button inside the image window to open a context menu or press the CTRL+D key. Multiple Views It is possible to open multiple views of the same buer. A buer can even be displayed in dierent view types at the same time. In DaVis Classic a view type can be opened from submenu View of the Buer Menu or by pressing CTRL+I (to open a 2D image window). In Project dialogs the dialog itself denes how many views are available for the user. Some dialog items must be used to open or close a view, but often the context menu can be used to change the view type. Icons for View Types In DaVis Classic a small icon is displayed in the left of the windows title bar, indicating the view type (see table 9.1).

9.2

Palettes and Color LookUp Tables

The Palette or Color LookUp Table (CLUT) denes a sequence of 256 colors to be used for the image and vector display. There are 21 dierent predened palettes ranging from pure gray scales, dierent false color representa126

9.2 Palettes and Color LookUp Tables

normal image buer in 2D view vector buer in 2D view multi frame buer in 2D view prole view spreadsheet simple 3D view 3D view (OpenGL window) Table 9.1: Icons of the dierent view types.

tions to centered palettes with white or black in the middle and to dierent color progresses on both sides (useful for FLOAT buers with negative and positive intensities). File DaVis.col in the DaVis main directory contains a denition of the dierent color lookup tables in ASCII-format. It is possible to change already existing tables or to dene new ones by editing this particular le. The mapping from intensities to colors is dened by the Color Mapping and Resolution.

9.2.1

Color Mapping and Resolution

The user selected color resolution is used by the mapping from pixel intensity or vector length to the color in which the pixel/vector is displayed on screen. In DaVis there are 256 colors, indexed from 0 to 255, which are arranged in the order of the active palette. Assume an image buer of the type WORD. It can contain intensity values from 0 to 65535 counts, which have to be displayed with 256 colors. Therefore the software maps the 65536 intensity values to the 256 colors. The value of a resolution corresponds to the number of counts which is responsible for the distribution of all 256 colors. This is done in equal intervals. When color "256" is reached, the mapping starts again with color "0" (wrapping) or color 255 is used for all larger intensities. The mapping of some resolutions for a WORD buer (counts 0-65535) is given below. For a FLOAT buer it would be basically the same, but only the positive integer values (up to 65535) are taken into account for the mapping. The way of displaying negative counts is set in the Data and Display Properties dialog, which can be opened with a right mouse click inside the image window. 127

9 Image and Vector Display

Special resolutions are useful for FLOAT buers with negative values, large positive values or a small range: 0-Max, +/- Max and Min-Max. This resolutions can be used for WORD buers, too! The resolution Optimal leads to the "best" resolution determined by the program taking the maximum intensity of the whole buer into account. With this resolution the image is displayed in the maximum range of colors. For FLOAT buers with a small range of intensities the optimal resolution is a min-max resolution. Then, there is no appearance of "turn-overs" with abrupt changes, when the highest color is reached and the next higher intensity is displayed in color "0" again. The resolution can also be changed with the buttons Resolution UP Resolution DOWN . and

9.2.2

Examples for Color Mapping

Resolution 64K Distributes the 256 colors in intervals of 256 counts and covers the whole intensity range of WORD buers without a "turn over" (wrapping). color 255 254 .. .. .. 2 1 0 count 65280-65535 65024-65279 .. .. .. 512-767 256-511 0-255

Resolution 512 Leads to a new color after each interval of two counts. At count "511" all colors are used once and the mapping starts again with color "0" for count 256 and so on, if the repeated palette mapping (wrapping) is enabled. Otherwise all intensities above "511" are displayed in the last color "255". 128

9.2 Palettes and Color LookUp Tables

color 0 255 254 253 .. .. .. 2 1 0

count 512-513 510-511 508-509 506-507 .. .. .. 4-5 2-3 0-1

Resolution Min-Max The range between the minimum and maximum value of the buer is devided into 256 areas, which are mapped to the color table. Let d = (max-min)/256. color intensity 255 254 .. .. .. 2 1 0 255*d ... 256*d-1 254*d ... 255*d-1 .. .. .. 2*d ... 3*d-1 d ... 2*d-1 0 ... d-1

9.2.3

Gamma Correction

The gamma correction can be used to make images look brighter ( < 1) or darker ( > 1) without changing the mapped intensity range, i.e. the display of the minimum and maximum intensities. Gamma correction adapts the display to the non-linear sensitivity of the human eye. The mapping from pixel intensities Iin to the color palette entry Iout is given by the exponential function Iout = Iin where the intensities are normalized to the range [0..1). You can see the eect of the gamma correction not only at the images themselves but also at the deformed image color palette (see page 134). The gamma value can either be entered directly, set by the vertical slider, or set to default value 1 by the corresponding button. 129

9 Image and Vector Display

For RGB colored buers the gamma values for each color component can be dened seperatly.

9.2.4

Edit Palette

DaVis includes a comfortable way to create an own color palettes. The Color Palette Editor is called by the Edit Palette entry of the menu Window / Set Palette. When the window rst opens the currently selected palette is cleared and a single white entry is preseleceted at the center of the palette (position 127). Values at up to 20 dierent (and arbitrary) interpolation positions can be set in the palette at one time.

Figure 9.1: The Color Palette Editor The dierent items in this window and their functions are: The button Clear Palette will set the palette to its initial settings (only one white interpolation point at the palette center) The color palette at the bottom of the window shows the edited palette at its current stage 130

9.2 Palettes and Color LookUp Tables

The Interpolate button to its right determines if the colors is interpolated between neighbour color palette entries. The slider above it marks the current position of the palette for changes. The texteld to its right shows this position (166 in this case). A new position is chosen by entering a new position (0..255) in the texteld (plus pressing the RETURN button), changing the silder position with the mouse or pressing the / buttons to move to the previous / next dened interpolation position. By drawing the sliders R, G, B the red, green and blue component of a color are selected and the intensity set with the slider Lightn., the result is shown in the colored rectangle below. E.g.: red= 255, green=255, blue=0, lightness=200 will yield (dark) yellow. The position in color space is shown on the leftcolor map. A much easier way to select a color is clicking in the color map with your mouse. While you hold down the button the color below your mouse cursor is shown on the sliders and in the colored rectangle. Please note that the color map only contain saturated colors (where at least one component is 255, that is lightness = 255). Colors as e.g. dark yellow or grey have to be derived from the saturated colors yellow or white and darkened by setting the Lightness slider to lower values. With the button Add/Replace Color you add the currently visible color in the colored rectangle area to the palette either adding a new interpolation point to the palette or replacing the color of an old one, depending on the palette slider position. With the button Delete Color the interpolation of the current palette slider position is removed (if there has been one) Pressing the button equidistant will create a black-grey-white color palette with the selected number of interpolation points entered in the texeld to its left at equidistant positions. This can be a good starting point to create new color palettes: Only the colors have to be substituted (using succesively the buttons or to position the slider above the set positions, choosing a new color and replacing old ones) and the modied palette is saved to and reloaded With the buttons from the le userpal_N.col, where N is the number of the active palette. The le name is created automatically with the path of the DaVis startup directory. If these color palette les are found at the start up of DaVis in the DaVis directory they are loaded automatically overwriting DaVis standard palettes with the corresponding number. When deleting these les with the Windows le explorer DaVis default maps are visible again. In this way, own palettes can be saved and made available for further DaVis sessions. The les 131

9 Image and Vector Display

userpal_N.col have a simple ASCII le format. Numbers can be changed with any text editor if necessary. The button Color path will show the color palette entries in the color map above (see gure 9.1 above). Please note that because only saturated colours are shown, visually dierent colors that vary only in lightness (as e.g. black, grey and white, dark yellow and light yellow) are shown at the same position. As long as only the sliders R, G, B, Lightness or palette position are moved or the mouse is moved across the color map the color path will stay visible. This allows to select a position along the color path and choose a new color for an intermediate interpolation point. But once a mouse button is released the color pass will be gone (but can be redrawn again after e.g. adding the selected color to the color palette).

9.3

Data and Display Properties Dialog

The parmeters for the Image Display of the active window are dened in the Data and Display Properties dialog (see gure 9.2).

Figure 9.2: Data and Display Attributes dialog To open this dialog the user has to select the item Image Display in the Window menu or click with the right mouse button inside the desired image view, open the context menu and select item Data and Display Properties, or use a corresponding button in a Project dialog. If this dialog is opened in DaVis Classic and the user activates another view, the dialog automatically updates itself and presents the settings of the new view. The dialog is splitted into a tree view on the left side and the corresponding cards on the right side. Not all cards are available for all view types, but 132

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

always the tree view starts with the buer properties, followed by general view settings, and ending with special settings for the view type (image and vector settings, 3D settings and more). In the following sections the dierent cards are explained individual. Special settings e.g. for 3D OpenGL views are explained at the end of the chapter. The following buttons are available for all cards: Close sends the settings to the active image window and closes the dialog. Apply activates the settings. As Default stores all the settings of all cards as default values, which will be used when opening another image window, even after restarting DaVis. The default settings can be dierent for the buer types: There are default settings for Word buers, for Float buers, for Vector buers, for Vector Backgrounds and for Proles. To All copies the active settings to all open windows. This function is working either for image windows (if the active buer is an image buer) or for vector windows (if the active buer is a vector buer). In a small dialog (gure 9.3) the user is asked about the parameter set to be copied: Often only a restricted set of display parameters should be copied, e.g. only the settings of the active card. Or the user does not want to mix settings of WORD buers and FLOAT buers.

Figure 9.3: Copy display settings to all open views. Reset changes all parameters to the standard settings, which have been stored by pressing the As Default button. Factory changes all parameters to the standard factory settings from the rst installation of DaVis. With both bitmap buttons the settings can be stored or loaded. After pressing those buttons, a new dialog opens (see gure 9.4): Here the user can store the active settings into a named slots. Just enter a name for the active settings and press button Save to remember the parameters. The display settings can be used again later after selecting a slot and pressing the Load button, and the slots are stored for later use when shutting down DaVis. Each slot can be 133

9 Image and Vector Display

removed by pressing the Delete button. Even the Import and Export to les on harddisc is possible.

Figure 9.4: Load or store display settings to slots and to les..

9.3.1

Add Ons

All simple image and vector views display the colored image or vector eld and use some add ons to present additional information: scales, palette, overlays and in DaVis Classic, texts in the title bar. Some of this add ons can be seen in the example of gure 134 about the Simple 2D View.

Figure 9.5: At the right and bottom of the image some Add Ons are displayed: the scales, mouse proles and color palette with intensity scalings. The rst line of card Add Ons denes some information to be displayed on top of a stand alone window in the title bar in DaVis Classic: the buer number, the resolution and gamma value, the date and time of the buer creation. In the center of the card a placeholder for the image itself can be found. Grouped around the image placeholder some additional objects can be enabled 134

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Figure 9.6: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Add Ons

or disabled to the left, right and bottom of the image itself. The x-prole and x-scales are displayed below the image area, the y-prole and y-scales right to the image area. If wished, the y-scales can be displayed on the left. When moving the mouse cursor above the image, the prole is updated immediately to display the row or column. A small cursor line in the scales give the actual mouse position. For a multi frame overview the display of individual scales is possible. In this case each frame gets its own x- and y-scales, which is useful when displaying an image with dierent scaling denitions for each frame. If this mode is disabled, the overview displays scalings only on the bottom and on the right of the window, so each column gets one scale and each row gets one scale. The color bar is especially useful together with the intensity scale. They are represented by the elds on the very right. For vector images a second color bar and intensity scale can display the vector color bar, while the rst bar is used for the background (image) color. When moving the mouse above the image, small cursor lines give the position in the intensity scale. Pressing the centered image button will disable or enable the overlay painting, which are stored in special buer attributes. By default the palette bars are painted in a width of 16 pixel, but the user can increase (or decrease) the value. The description labels of the vertical scales can be rotated. The characters are either written from top to bottom or, by default, rotated by 90 degrees and centered to the view. Press the Font button to change font and color of the scales. The next dialog (see gure 9.7) gives access to dierent font types and their size. Even italic 135

9 Image and Vector Display

or underlined fonts are possible. Press button Color to open another dialog, where one out of 12 pre-dened colors can be selected for the text display. The same dialog is used to dene the Background Color of all add ons. This is by default a light gray color. The user can select one out of 16 pre-dened colors.

Figure 9.7: Dialogs to dene a font and to select a color.

9.3.2

Range of Proles

In card Add Ons - Proles the intensity range of the additional proles can be dened. This range is included in the default settings and will be used when opening a new image window. Dierent modes for automatic range detection (0-max, min-max, +-max and bitshift) are available, but the user can enter a free range. Press the plus and minus buttons to increase or decrease the range, or enter minimum and maximum into the edit items. The proles are repainted corresponding to the new values after each selection, after pressing the Enter-key in the edit items or after pressing the Apply button.

9.3.3

Display of Buer Attributes

Use the Default Attribute Display card to setup the display of buer attributes as overlays: The values of selected buer attributes can be painted above the image or vector eld. This Default card is responsible for the default settings: All here dened attribute display denitions will be used in all views of DaVis. Individual settings for the active view can be dened in DaVis Classic only. Therefore open card Properties Attribute Display. Both cards can be used on the same way, the dialog items are equal. 136

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Figure 9.8: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Add Ons - Default Attribute Display

Enable or disable the display of buer attributes in the rst line of this card. Disabling does not delete the setup, so this checkbox is an easy way to hide the attribute display temporary. The lower part of this card manages the denition of attribute displays: You can either select a denition and edit the parameters, or delete the settings, or you can Add another attribute to the list. All types of attributes can be added, but for array attributes the rst item of the array is used for display only. After adding or selecting an attribute, you can dene the position (in pixel coordinate), text size (in pixel height) and text color of the display. When selecting a xed to screen position, the coordinates are used relative to the upper left corner of the image view: Zooming into the image and moving the viewpoint will not move the attributes text. On the other hand, when xed to screen is not selected, the text is connected to a buer position and will move corresponding to the viewpoint and to the zoom, and the text size is zoomed by the same zoom factor as the image. The text color can either be dened by the three color components red, green and blue, each value between 0 and 255, or the color list can be used to select a predened standard color. Display formated attributes The last item in this card is useful for displaying a formated output of the attributes value. One text line can be lled with a free text, and every double percentage characters are replaced by the attributes value. E.g. a constant text, followed by the attribute value, is displayed by: The value is: %% 137

9 Image and Vector Display

If the formated text includes a %FRAME%, then this substring is replaced by the index of the displayed frame. More replacements are done for the index of the displayed plane %PLANE% and the number of the displayed buer %BUFFER%. For example write into the formated text: This is buffer %BUFFER%. Create display by macro code If the formated text starts with two dollar characters ($$), the line is executed as CL macro and the returned string value is displayed on screen. E.g. $$ExStr("%%",1,4) will display only four characters of the string attribute value. This example displays formated oat numbers, here with ve digits at all and one digit after the dot: $$FormatNumber("5.1f","%%") In this case some text is displayed in front of the formated oating point attribute: $$"Time: "+FormatNumber("5.1f","%%") It is possible to write the averaged image intensity to the display: $$"Avg="+AvgRect(%BUFFER%,0)

9.3.4

Image

The Image card (see gure 9.10) denes the color mapping of the displayed image window. While most items in this dialog manage the range settings for the mapping function, only two items are used for other purposes: the color palette (see page 126 about Palettes and Color LookUp Tables). The palette can be either the global palette, which is shown on the left side of DaVis main window in Classic mode, or an individual palette. Press the Palette button to select an individual new color palette in the Select Palette dialog of gure 9.9. This dialog can be canceled with the Escape key or with a mouse click to the cross in the dialogs title bar. A new palette is selected by clicking on a numbered button above the selected palette, or click with left mouse button into the palette itself. The brightness of the selected palette can be changed easily with the slider on the right of card Image. This gamma value, described on page 129, can be changed in the range 0.10 to 10. Press button =1 below the slider to reset the value. The current resolution is displayed near the active palette: the value right to the top of the palette gives the maximum of the selected intensity range and corresponds to the uppermost color of the palette. The value right to the bottom of the palette gives the minimum and corresponds to the rst color at the lower end of the palette. 138

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Figure 9.9: Dialog for palette seletion

Figure 9.10: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Image Both minimum and maximum can be changed directly by entering new values and pressing the Enter key or the Apply button. The color mapping mode is changing to arbitrary range. The arrow buttons right to the palette are changing both the maximum and minimum of the arbitrary range. The buttons right to the edit elds for maximum and minimum are changing their values by thirty percent. All other modes of the group of ranges dene either a constant range or a range, which will be recalculated automatically whenever the buer contents change or whenever a new view is opened. Mode optimal bit shift is calculating the best bit shift value whenever the image window is opened. If mode xed bit shift is used as default, the upper range maximum is calculated from the buer intensities. Both bitshift modes are useful for Word buers, e.g. unprocessed camera images. Modes 0..max, +/- max, min .. max and of cause the arbitrary range are very useful for oat buers or to display a small intensity range of Word buers. 139

9 Image and Vector Display

In the three max modes a percentage value (Histogram) can be dened to shrink the range: When a buer includes some extremely low or high values, which disturb the wanted range, then the mapping function calculates a histogram of all intensities and cuts o all intensities outside of the given percentage of pixels. Valid percentage values are in the range from 1% to 100%, default is 100%. When a colored RGB buer is displayed, minimum and maximum are always in the range of the color components (0...255 for 32 bit RGB buers). Minimum and maximum are used for each color component to cut o the colors: A component with an intensity below the minimum is set to 0 (very dark), a component above the maximum is set to 255 (very bright). For RGB buers the better way is the changing of the common gamma value or, if checkbox RGB right to the Gamma text is selected, changing the gamma values for each color component (red, green and blue). For large multiframe buers the min/max frame dependend ag should be enabled to calculate the minimum and maximum on the displayed frame(s) only. Otherwise the complete buer would be used, which could take a lot of time for buers with a large number of frames. For buers with strong intensity dierences from frame to frame this mode makes it easy to swap between the frames in the display and always use the optimal range. If wrapping is selected, all intensities outside of the dened resolution range are mapped into the palette. If switched o, all intensities larger than the resolution maximum are displayed using the highest color (white in the example), the intensities lower than the resolution minimm are displayed using the lowest color (black in the example). For a image buer with additional scalar components the component can be selected in a list on bottom of the image card. The rst mode is used to display the image data itself, all other items in the list are the component names.

9.3.5

Color Image Display

When real color images are displayed (not false-color representations of intensities), two additional subdialogs are shown below the image card of the Data and Display Properties dialog. The rst one, Intensity mapping, can be used to create a special lookup table for the mapping from source buer intensities (for Red, Green and Blue) to displayed intensities. In the subdialog Color Image Display some special parameters of color images can be adjusted: 140

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Figure 9.11: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Color Image Display Color interpolation method This applies only to buers containing raw images from single-chip color cameras whose red, green and blue sensitive pixels are arranged in the so-called Bayer pattern.

These buers are marked by the buer attribute RGBFrame<n> (n = frame number) with a value > 0. In this case a color interpolation takes place which converts the intensities from the Red, Green and Blue pixels to a color image to be displayed on the screen. DaVis oers three dierent color interpolation algorithms: 1. Bilinear interplation only: the missing color component of each pixel is interpolated by all four neighbouring pixels of the same color component (R,G,B). 2. Bilinear interplation + sharpening: this is the best algorithm which combines a bilinear interpolation with an edge detection algorithm which takes 3x3 pixels (8 neighbours) into account. This makes the image look sharper than (1) and minimises color artefakts at edges. 3. No interpolation (fast): The simplest and fastest algorithm does not interpolate missing color components but simply takes the value of the 141

9 Image and Vector Display

nearest pixel of the same component. Only the green components on red or blue pixels are averaged between the two green neighbours.

White balancing Images from color cameras often have a color fault, for example they look too green. This results from non-white light used when exposing the image or from dierent sensitivities of the red, green and blue color component. In order to avoid this and make white look white, you can apply the white balancing which adjusts the relative weights of red, green and blue by multiplying the components by factors. When white balancing check box is activated, the red and blue component factors can be adjusted using the scroll bars or the input elds. In most cases, the Automatic White Balance button calculates good weightening factors so you dont need to determine the factors manually.

9.3.6

Frames and Planes

Most buers are including one image frame only. When running a two camera system or a camera with double exposure, all the images are stored in dierent frames of the same buer. The Frames card (see gure 9.12) manages the display of a single frame or of a combined display of dierent frames.

Figure 9.12: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Frames For those buers the user can display either all frames in an image window (with the rst frame on top and the other frames below) or display one frame only. The frame can be selected in the list button. If the number of frames is too large (> 16), it is not possible to display them all together, and the software automatically opens a single frame display showing the rst buer 142

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

frame. The same can happen for large buers when the needed memory for the display is larger than 50 MB (width height screenresolution). Sometimes (e.g. for PIV systems) is is useful to display two frames in stacked pairs (0 and 1 or 2 and 3 or 4 and 5 or 6 and 7) or to display the sum of two frames (0+1 or 2+3). Those modes can be selected only if the buer includes this number of frames. In the simple 2D image window (see page 158) a slider appears on the bottom of the window to move through the frames in a simple way like in the movie dialog. The so called frame slider accepts mouse clicks and the arrow keys (with and without the Ctrl key). If the active windows is a Multiframe Overview Window (see page 159), this card presents controls to dene the arrangement of the displayed frames. Planes For multi plane buers with Z-size larger than 1 a special item is displayed on bottom of this card: Select the plane to be displayed, or use value -1 to display all planes stacked from rst plane on top to the last plane, equal to the stacked frame display.

9.3.7

Vector Display

The Vector Display card (see gure 9.13) is used to dene dierent modes for the general vector display: the way of vector painting (with or without grid), the grid factor, a relative or absolute vector oset and the reference vector.

Figure 9.13: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Vector Display Eight modes are available to disable or enable the vectors itself and the grid: no vector display: is useful to display the background only, 143

9 Image and Vector Display

vector arrows: is the default mode to display vectors, calculated from the vectors vector grid: connects the vector tips to form a distorted grid. It shows how the initially regular square grid is deformed when the shift represented by the vector eld is applied. vector grid + undistorted grid: show the above plus the regular vector grid (connecting the vector base rather than the vector tips) strain ellipses: This option draw ellipses rather than vector arrows at the grid positions. The dimension of the principal and the secondary axis is proportional to r(1 + maximum normal strain) and the r(1 + minimum normal strain) (that is (1 + principal strain values)). The orientation of the principal axis is the maximum strain angle p . Principal strain values of 1 in both direction means no distortion (circle of radius r), values higher than 1 mean expansion, values smaller than 1 mean compression. By default the size r of strain ellipses is 1/3 of the vector grid. But the size r of the strain ellipses can be adjusted changing the vector length factor to values dierent from 1. strain ellipses (strain 5 x exaggerated) : This option also draws strain ellipses but the dimensions of the principal and the secondary axis is exaggerated 5 times, that is the size of the axis are: r(max(-1,1 + 5 maximum normal strain)) and r(max(-1,1 + 5*minimum normal strain)) strain ellipses at vector tip: same as strain ellipses, but drawn at the vector tip position. This display mode is useful when looking at a time series of vector elds that describe the path of structures. This way the strain ellipses follow the structures. strain ellipses at vector tip (5x exagg.): same as strain ellipses (strain 5 x exaggerated), but drawn at the vector tip position. The width (in pixel) of the displayed vectors can be changed between constant 1 pixel for all zoom factors or 1 to 9 pixel zoomed. When zooming into the display, those width is multiplied by the zoom factor, so the width becomes larger when zooming. The default value is 1 pixel to paint vectors with a small width independent of the zoom. In the list in the second row of this card an oset mode for each vector can be selected. By default all vectors are displayed with absolute velocities. More 144

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

possibilities are the velocity relative to average of all vectors, the velocity relative to arbitrary user dened values Vx and Vy (both in [pixel]). In mode relative to neighbors a radius has to be dened to calculate the average of all vectors inside a circle surrounding each vector. The last mode, average to buer, can be used to display the dierence between two vector buers. The display grid factor denes the number of vectors to be shown. In the selection box you can choose from the values 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4 and 8 independently for the x and y direction . When choosing 1/2 for one of them and leaving the other at 1, the number of vectors in one direction are doubled and the additional vectors are interpolated. When choosing factor 2, every second vectors in that direction is painted. When choosing 1/4 in both directions, 16 times the number of vectors are shown and may cause a time intensive painting. The vector length factor is used to resize all vectors for a better view according to the measurements. In the corresponding textbox an arbitrary factor for the pixel displacement can be set. In mode absolute vector length an absolute speed (in m/s) is displayed with a given pixel length. This mode is interesting to compare vector buers with dierent Piv dts, the times between rst and second image for vector calculation. The xed vector length is useful for vector buers with a large range of the vector length values. In this mode all vectors are displayed with the same pixel length, so it is more easy to compare the directions of large and small vectors. The vector arrows can either be centered to the grid, which means that the middle of the arrow is positioned on the grid, or the arrow starts at the grid. The last mode is known from DaVis 6 . If invers is selected, all vectors are painted into the invers direction. Of cause a negative factor can be entered instead of the invers ag. If show reference is selected, a reference vector will be displayed in the upper left corner of the vector image. Select one out of sixteen predened colors to display the reference vector and its length description (e.g. 5m/s), and another color or the transparent mode for the background. A value for the reference vector can be dened suitable for the measurement. The size of the reference text can be set to the default text size or to one of the sizes 10 cpi, 15 cpi, 20 cpi and even larger.

9.3.8

Vector Color

In card Vector Color (see gure 9.14) the color mapping for vector arrows (or grid) can be dened the same way as in card Image. Both bitshift range modes and the gamma settings are missing because of being useful for camera 145

9 Image and Vector Display

images only. So we have four range modes, the wrappring and histogram function, and all the items to change the range manually. The palette is either the standard vector palette (the left palette in the palette window in DaVis Classic) or a palette selected for this view only.

Figure 9.14: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Vector Color In this section the most important modes of vector color calculation are described. More information about this modes and everything about the missing modes, special results of the vector processing, are given in the PIV FlowMaster Manual. After changing the mode in the list box, the minimum and maximum of the intensity range are automatically recalculated depending on the selected range mode. color #1: all vectors are displayed with the same color, which can be selected from a list of sixteen predened colors. vector choice: use four dierent colors to display every vector in a color depending on its choice. A fth color is available for smoothed and lled vectors. If this mode is selected, the Mapping part of this card is replaced by some items to select the ve colors. image buer: (for DaVis Classic only) The color is taken from the pixel intensities in the dened image buer. The position of the reference pixel for every vector can be selected from four modes: use or use not the grid to calculate the reference pixel position, use the corresponding frame for multiframe vector buers or use the frames 0 and 2 and 4 and so on (means every second frame of the image buer). velocity |v|: the vector length 146

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Vx component (u): the horizontal vector component Vy component (v): the vertical vector component Vz component (w): the depth (3D ) component frame color: if the vector buer includes more than one frame and the frame display attribute is set to display all (or a range of) frames at once, the color of a vector depends on the frame the vector belongs to. This mode is useful for the 3D-display of vector buers, when the user tries to get an overview of the dierent planes of vectors. z-pos: Another useful setting for 3D vector buers: The z-position of every vector is used to determine the color of a vector. scalar component: uses an additional scalar component in the vector buer to determine the vector color. The component can be selected from a list of numbers or with real names, if the calculation function created those information. A complete list of all derived vector background and vector color modes and the formulas behind them is provided in more detail in the corresponding section of the vector batchprocessing routines. Please refer also to the table on page 147 Vector color / background batch op. group chapter / page mode |V| vector length, Vx component (u), Vy component (v), Vz component (w), peak ratio 1./2. or value 1., vector choice (0=o,1-5), vector angle, |V| pixel shift, |V| displacement, |V| speed 2D-Div-xy -(Exx + Eyy), 2D-Div-xz -(Exx + Ezz), 2D-Div-yz -(Eyy + Ezz), 3D-Div-xyz -(Exx+Eyy+Ezz), extract scalar eld : vector component see chapter 11.6.3, page 247

extract scalar eld : divergence

see chapter 11.6.4, page 249

continued on next page

147

9 Image and Vector Display

Vector color / background mode -divergence Exx + Eyy, |divergence| |Exx + Eyy|, 3D-Div (Emax+Emin+Emin), 3D-Div (Emax+Emin+Emax) rot-z Eyx - Exy, - rot-z -(Eyx - Exy), rot-y Exz - Ezx, rot-x Ezy - Eyz, swirling strength, shear strength, swirl + shear di. to 4 neighb., di. to 8 neighb., Rot 3D

batch op. group

chapter / page

extract scalar eld : rotation and shear

see chapter 11.6.5, page 250

extract scalar eld : others basic vector arithmetics / vector postprocessing extract scalar eld : strain

see chapter 11.6.7, page 253 see chapter 11.6.1, page 245 see chapter 11.6.6, page 251

strain Exx, strain Exy, strain Exz, strain Eyx, strain Eyy, strain Eyz, strain Ezx, strain Ezy, strain Ezz strain rate Exx - Eyy, |strain rate| |Exx - Eyy|, maximum normal strain 2D , minimum normal strain 2D, maximum shear strain 2D, maximum strain angle 2D, maximum shear angle 2D, avg. shear (Exy+Eyx), poisson r. -strain max/min,

continued on next page

148

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

Vector color / background mode poisson r. -Eyy/Exx, poisson r. -strain min/max

batch op. group

chapter / page

Table 9.2: Vector color and vector background modes

9.3.9

Vector Background

The Vector Background card (see gure 9.15) opens for vector buers and presents the same features like the Image card, but additional settings for the background mode. The background is painted with black color by default and overlayed by the vectors. But the background of each vector can be set to an individual calculated color, and those colors can be smoothed to avoid blocks in grid size of constant colors. To smooth the background a bilinear interpolation between (available) neighbor vectors is used. For missing vectors the background value is replaced by the average value of the available vectors. A list of dierent functions is available for the background calculation, which is executed online during the image display. Note that some functions may take a long time of some seconds to prepare the background. With the combination of vector length, vector color and background color three dierent information about the same vector eld can be displayed in the same image.

Figure 9.15: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Vector Background The most important modes of vector background calculation are described here. For more information please read the corresponding chapters of the 149

9 Image and Vector Display

PIV FlowMaster Manual. Note, that not all modes may be available in every project! After changing the calculation function, the minimum and maximum are automatically recalculated corresponding to the selected range mode. unicolor: the background is painted constant with one out of sixteen predened colors. choice: the index of each vectors choice (the n-th best vector) is mapped to a color. The user can dene dierent colors (from a list of sixteen colors) for all four choices and for lled or smoothed vectors. Additionally the beckground color can be selected. image buer: (for DaVis Classic only) the entered buer is shown the same way as in an image buer display. image le: (for DaVis projects) Select a image le or a SET of images to be displayed as background. When using a SET le, the image with index corresponding to the displayed vector le is loaded. source (raw) image: display the source image of the vector calculation. The le name of the source image is either given by a buer attribute or detected automatically when loading the vector buer. streamlines: Streamlines are connecting the vectors (only the direction of the vector is important) to give the path of hypothetical particles if the velocity eld would stay constant (of course it does not). Caution: Do not confuse streamlines with streaklines which show for each point where the particle came from. strikelines: Same as streamlines, but perpendicular to them. stream- and strikelines: Streamlines displayed together with strikelines. velocity |v|: the vector length Vx component (u): the horizontal vector component Vy component (v): the vertical vector component Vz component (w): the depth (3D ) component frame: if the vector buer includes more than one frame, the color of the vector background depends on the frame the vectors belong to. This mode is useful for multi frame vector buers. 150

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

z-pos: Another useful setting for 3D vector buers: The z-position of every vector is used to determine the color of a vector. scalar component: uses an additional scalar component in the vector buer to determine the vector color. The component can be selected from a list with numbers or, if the calculation function created those information, with real names. By default the rst color of the selected color palette is used to paint the background of disabled vectors. This color index can be changed to each of the 256 palette colors. It is impossible to select a predened color as for the vector choices, because DaVis uses either the palette or the list of colors. When selecting transform background, the image is transformed to display the color information at the ending position of the vectors (at the vector head). This mode is useful for source images being the second image of the vector calculation. With a second parameter the lling level of the transformation has to be dened: in raw mode disabled vectors are displayed with empty space in the lled background. In ll up mode a simple lling is executed to reduce the empty spaces. When ll up all is selected, all empty spaces are lled, even masked areas. Streamlines A streamline is dened as line that is at any position parallel to the local velocity vector V (x, y, z, t) = u + v + w k. If we dene i j ds = dx + dy + dz k i j (9.1)

as an innitesimal vector along the streamline. Since this is parallel to V we can get following equations ds V = 0 (w dy v dz) + (u dz w dx) + (v dx u dy) k = 0 i j (9.2) (9.3)

Setting each component separately to zero gives three dierential equations which dene the streamline. The three velocity components u, v, w must be given as functions of x, y, z before these equations cam be integrated. To set the constants of integration it is sucient to specify some point x0 , y0 , z0 through which the streamline passes. In 2D we have dz = 0 and w = 0, and only the k component of the equation above is non-trivial. It can be written as an ordinary dierential equation for the streamline shape y(x). dy v = dx u (9.4) 151

 ds = dx + dy + dz k as an innitesimal arc-length vector along the streamline. Since this is parallel to V , we must have ds V = 0 (w dy v dz) + (u dz w dx) + (v dx u dy) = 0 k Separately setting each component to zero gives three dierential equations which dene the streamline. The three velocity components u, v, w, must be given as functions of x, y, z before these equations can be integrated. To set the constants of integration, it is sucient to specify some point xo , yo , zo through which the streamline passes,

9 Image and Vector Display

y V ds V

y v dy dx x xo yo 2D streamline u x

ds xo yo z o

3D streamline

In 2-D we have dz = 0 and w = 0, and only the k component of the equation above is Figure 9.16: Example of streamlines non-trivial. It can be written as an Ordinary Dierential Equation for the streamline shape y(x). dy v = dx u Both u(x, y) and and v(x, y) must be given to allow integration, and xo , yoand x0 ,given to set be Again, u(x, y) v(x, y) must be given to allow integration must be y0 must given the set the integration aconstants. to integration contants. In numerical integration, xo , yo would serve as the initial values. 1

Streaklines

A streakline is associated with a particular point P in space which has the uid moving past it. All points which pass through this point are said to be the streakline of point P . An example of a streakline is the continuous line of smoke emitted by a chimney at point P which will have some curved shape if the wind has a time-varying direction. A streakline involves the motion of all the uid elements along its length. Hence, the trajectory equations for a pathline are applied to all the uid elements dening a streakline. The gure below illustrates streamlines and streaklines for the case of a smoke involves the motion of all the uid elements along its length. Hence, the trajectory equations for being a pathline are applied to all by a chimney at point P streakline. continuously emitted the uid elements dening the . One particular smoke pu The gure below illustrates streamlines, pathlines, and streaklines for the case of a smoke A shifted by the wind is also identied. The the presence of a shifting wind. snapshot being continuously emitted by a chimney at point P , in gure corresponds to a One particular smoke pu A is also is along The particular direction. when the wind everywhere identied. one gure corresponds to a snapshot when the
wind everywhere is along one particular direction.
streakline from point P (smoke line)
us neo nta lines ta ins tream s

Unlike a pathline, which involves the motion of only one uid element A in time, a streakline

instantaneous wind velocity

A
streakline at successive times pathline of fluid element A (smoke puff)

In a steady ow, streamlines, pathlines, and streaklines all cooincide. In this example they would all be marked Example of streaklines Figure 9.17: by the smoke line.

In steady ow streamlines and streaklines all coincide. In the example of gure 9.17 they would all be marked by the smoke line. 152

9.3 Data and Display Properties Dialog

A complete list of all derived vector background and vector color modes and the formulas behind them is provided in more detail in the corresponding section of the vector batchprocessing routines. Please refer also to the table on page 147

9.3.10

Raw Vector Background

The Vector Background Raw Image card (see gure 9.18) opens for vector buers and presents the same features for color mapping as the Image card. As a raw image we understand the source image of the vector calculation. The source image le is either given by a buer attribute or detected automatically when loading the vector buer. When calculating the vector background image from the dierent functions mentioned in the last section, no information about the source image can be seen. Therefore the raw image is used: When enabled, the intensity (or lightness) of the source image and the colors of the background image are combined and displayed alltogether. Then the structure of the source image is visible in the background.

Figure 9.18: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Vector Background Raw Image

The raw image can optional be corrected by the active image correction function. Because the raw image is internally prepared as a colored RGB image of intensities or lightness, the Gamma values of each color component can be changed individually and no color palette is available. 153

9 Image and Vector Display

9.3.11

Mouse Window for Zoom and more

The Mouse Window card (see gure 9.19) is available for the planar image and vector display. This special window is always positioned to the lower right of the mouse cursor and moves together with the mouse cursor above the image. Special information about the area below the mouse cursor are given: a magnier with a zoomed rectangle at the mouse position, available for all buer types, a 3D display of the intensities, available for images, a correlation map in 2D or 3D, or an online calculated vector from a simple correlation function. This modes are available for multi frame images only.

Figure 9.19: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Mouse Window The window size can be set to a free pixel size (width and height). Easily increase or decrease the size with the double size and half size buttons. The zoom is given relative to the used zoom in the image itself. The value is free with a lower border of 1 (= same zoom as the image display) and can be changed easily with the double zoom and half zoom buttons. For the correlation and vector modes the size of the correlation area must be selected in a list of possible sizes from 4x4 to 256x256.

9.4

Window Menus

When working with windows displaying dierent types of views, some important functions can be called from the Window menu below the DaVis title bar or from the context menu opened by a click with the right mouse button into the window. More functions are available in the tool bar or, in DaVis Projects, by controls near to the window. 154

9.4 Window Menus

The rst group of functions in the menu bars Window section is about resolution and color palette of the active window item. From here the color palette editor can be opened, see page 130. The second group is about changing the zoom factor or opening the Data and Display Properties dialog. The last item Mouse Action gives access to special actions on mouse clicks: Line and Angle Measurement to mark two positions in a window and display the length of this line and the angle in the Status text, or Zoom into Mouse Rect to select a rectangular area in the active window and enlarge this area for display. In the third and last group the Info Text can be cleared and the display of Tooltips can be enabled or disabled.

9.4.1

Resolution Functions

The Resolution menu can be used the same way as the list box in the tool bar to select a range mode for the color mapping. See the section about the Image Display Attributes: Image card on page 138.

A special function is the optimal resolution, which tries to nd the best resolution for the image or vector eld. If the old mode has been a bitshift mode, then the optimal bitshift is found and used as xed bitshift. If the old mode has been 0-Max, MinMax or +-Max, then the best range is calculated and the mode switches to range mode to x this range. Decrease the palette range of the active image (shortcut /).

Increase the palette range of the active image (shortcut *).

Palette: Change color palette for active window.

155

9 Image and Vector Display

9.4.2

Zoom Functions

With the help of several zoom functions the size and zoom factor of the active image window is changed (enlarged or shrunk) in DaVis Classic. In DaVis Project the size of each window is static, but the magnication can be changed. Set Zoom Factor A zoom factor for the active image window can directly be set. Click and scroll to the desired zoom factor, or enter a free zoom value and press the Return key to activate this value. The zoom factor is changed in certain steps with the following functions from the menu or from the tool bar:

Zoom 100% (shortcut F4): This function sets the size of the active window to 100%. It is the standard size whenever a new image window is created (except for very small or very large images). Zoom In (shortcut F2): Double the zoom factor of the active image. In DaVis Classic the window is enlarged but not automatically adjusted to the new size. Choose the function Optimal size to do it. Zoom Out (shortcut F3): This function decreases the zoom factor. In DaVis Classic the window size is shrinked to half its size. The window is adjusted automatically. Optimal Size (shortcut F5): Adjusts the size of the active image window so that all contents t into it. E.g. if an image is zoomed up, rst of all the window is too small to show contents. The function Optimal size makes the window exactly big enough. Maximize: Maximize the active window in a new dialog. Return to the last dialog with the Close button in the toolbar.

9.4.3

Line and Angle Measurement

If Line Measurement is selected in the Window menu of the project mode or in the Compute menu in DaVis Classic, the length of a line can be measured in every image view of the types Simple and Multiframe Overview: Move the mouse cursor onto the rst point of the line, press the left mouse button and move the cursor to the second position, holding the mouse button 156

9.4 Window Menus

pressed (mouse dragging). The line will follow the mouse cursor, its length is given as Status-Text in scaled units. The scale can be changed in the Buer Properties dialog. If the Shift-Key is pressed, the length is given is pixel units. Additionally the angle of the line is given, using the x-direction as angle of 0 degree.

9.4.4

Zoom into Mouse Rect

If Zoom into Mouse Rect is selected in the Window menu of the project mode or in the Compute menu in DaVis Classic, then dragging the mouse in a window will zoom the marked rectangle. Press the left mouse key on the upper left corner of the area you want to enlarge for display, then move the mouse cursor to the lower right corner while the left mouse key is pressed. Leave the key when nishing the selection. Now the marked area will be enlarged to ll the window, zoom factor and viewpoint are changed.

9.4.5

Window Context Menu

More window functions can be reached when clicking on a window with the right mouse button to open the context menu. Not all of this functions are available for all view types and for all dialogs. Some Project dialogs add special functions, please refere to the Project manual. Data and display properties opens the dialog with the same name (see page 132) and presents the rst card above the Status. Buer properties opens card Properties of the Data and Display Attributes dialog (see page 106). Buer scales opens the dialog with card Properties Scales (see page 109). Buer attributes opens the dialog with card Buer Attributes (see page 114). Buer statistics opens the dialog with card Statistics (see page 110). Lock/unlock buer: see page 106 about buer locking. Delete buer from memory. Export window stores the complete window display (including vector background image, scales and palettes) in a bitmap, JPEG or postscript le, see chapter Export 157

9 Image and Vector Display

Open some dierent buer views: normal view, prole, simple 3D, spreadsheet, 3D (OpenGL) views. Vector editing: For vector buers only (see PIV FlowMaster Manual ).

9.5
9.5.1

View Types
Simple (2D) Image View

The view type of gure 9.20 is the standard view for most image and vector buers. Here all the additional information like color palette, x/y-proles and scales can be displayed as dened in the Image Display Attributes: Image card.

Figure 9.20: The simple planar (2D) view displays an image or vector buer and optional scales, mouse proles and the color palette with intensity scalings. If an image is very small in one component (width or height), a prole view is opened by default. For a small width the data is displayed in a vertical prole. The minimum size of a real image is dened by the global variable DefaultMinImageHeight and can be changed in the Global Opptions dialog. When moving the mouse cursor on the image, the position and intensity of the pixel below the cursor are displayed in the status bar. If the SHIFT-key is pressed, the display uses unscaled values (pixel and counts). If the CTRLkey is pressed in a vector image with background display, the values of the background are displayed. When rolling the mouse wheel up or down, the zoom factor of the display changes by ve percent per wheel step. 158

9.5 View Types

For multiframe buers with single frame display an additional slider, the so called frame slider, is shown on bottom of the window. The user can simply scroll through the frames like in a movie player with mouse clicks on the slider, or with the arrow keys (with and without the Ctrl key). If more than one frame is displayed at the same time, the image window displays the frames above each other: The top frame is the rst frame, below follows the second, and so on. The frames are painted below each other without any deviding space. When moving the mouse on a frame, the coordinates of the position inside the frame are displayed in the status bar. The frame number itself is not displayed. To compare frames, especially to compare zoomed areas of all frames, the Multiframe Overview Window should be used.

9.5.2

Multiframe Overview

An example of this special window to display an overview of all frames of a multiframe buer is given in gure 9.21. The frames are arranged in dierent rows and columns (e.g. 2x2 or 4x4). All frames are displayed with the same resolution, same zoom and same viewpoint (coordinate of the upper left pixel). Moving the scrollbars in a zoomed display will move the position of all frames. If the checkboxes for horizontal and vertical proles are enabled in the Image Display Attributes dialog, the mouse cursor is painted as coordinate crosses in every frame, so the positions can easily be compared. In contrast to the simple image view, no line or column proles are added here.

Figure 9.21: The multiframe overview window displays some frames at the same time and can be used to compare those frames easily. For multiframe overview windows the card Frames (see gure 9.22) in the Image Display Attributes dialog presents a number of controls to arrange 159

9 Image and Vector Display

the frames: Enter a predened number of rows and columns (e.g. 3x1, 2x2, 3x3, 2x4) or enter free values. Change the display order between left to right, where the frames are ordered starting in the rst line from left to right and then into the next line, or top to bottom with the rst frames in the left column and the next frames in the next columns. For buers with a large number of included frames the index of the top left frame can be changed to scroll through all frames. When selecting the individual frame table, the frames can be arranged freely: Just enter the frame numbers is the table.

Figure 9.22: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Multiframes

9.5.3

Scatter Plot

Using the right mouse button on a vector eld you may obtain the Scatter Plot option in the pop-up window. The dialog oers a visualization of the velocity distribution of a vector eld. Each velocity vector is indicated by a dot in a two dimensional domain, e.g. Vx/Vy, Vx/Vz or Vy/Vz. This feature can be used to identify outliers in the vector eld more easily and to nd a suitable Allowed vector range for the vector postprocessing. In order to zoom in/out or to change the color use the buttons in the icon bar. To move the scatter plot origin press the left mouse button with the cursor on the scatter plot and move the mouse while the mouse button is still pressed. Using the right mouse button on a Scatter plot and selecting Data and display properties. . . you can access the display properties on the Scatter Plot card of gure 9.24. 160

9.5 View Types

Figure 9.23: Vector eld as 2D view and Scatter Plot.

Figure 9.24: Data and Display Attributes dialog: Scatter Plot Data Range: Species the data range for the scatter plot function. This can be either the complete vector eld or one of the rectangles 1-8. When a rectangle is selected the Rect. button becomes active. Using this button the software will ask you to declare a rectangle on the corresponding vector eld and is using this rectangle as input range for the new scatter plot. Calculating: Species the vector components Vx/Vy, Vx/Vz or Vy/Vz to be drawn in units [pixel] or [m/s] in the scatter plot window. Grid: Can be used to show a grid on the scatter plot for better localization of the velocity values. The grid size is set automatically to integer values and is changing with the zoom, this can not be changed manually. Zoom: Manual selection of the zoom. Can be changed by moving the slider. Value 1.00 indicates the optimal selection (just all vectors inside 161

9 Image and Vector Display

the display window), when the zoom is changed the display is updated automatically. Number of vectors in scatter plot: Shows the number of vectors in the scatter plot.

9.5.4

PDF

Using the right mouse button on a vector eld you may obtain the PDF option in the pop-up window. The Probability Density Function (PDF) computes a histogram of a vector eld where the Vx, Vy and/or Vz components are separated in certain velocity intervals. The PDF curve can be used to check whether the velocity eld computation has a bias toward integer velocity values, which is called peak locking eect. Peak locking can occur, for example, when the used seeding particles are too small and produce particle images on the CCD of less than one pixel in diameter.

A particle image size of 2-3 pixel guarantees a small bias to integer values.

1 2 3 4 5 6 A particle image size smaller than 1 pixel causes a strong bias to integer values.

Figure 9.25: Peak locking eect for small and big particle image size. Using the right mouse button on a PDF and selecting Data and display properties. . . you can access the display properties on the PDF card of gure 9.26. Data Range: Species the data range for the PDF function. This can be either the complete vector eld or or one of the rectangles 1-8. When a rectangle is selected the Rect. button becomes active. Using this button the software will ask you to declare a rectangle on the corresponding vector eld and is using this rectangle as input range for the new PDF. 162

9.5 View Types

Figure 9.26: Data and Display Attributes dialog: PDF Calculating: Species the velocity component for the calculation of the PDF. Either a single velocity component Vx, Vy, Vz or (for better statistics) the two components Vx,Vy can be selected. Complete V: Histogram of the corresponding velocity component for all values from minimum to maximum. V mod. 1: Histogram of the decimal places of the corresponding velocity component (cuts of the integer values, e.g. Vx=2.13 px Vx=0.13 px. V mod. 0.5: Works like V mod 1, velocities corresponding to a separation V > 0.5px are mapped to a value 1-V for a better estimation of the peak locking eect. Peak lock: This value allows to estimate the peak locking eect, a value of: 0: indicates no peak locking eect, 1: indicates a strong peak locking eect, < 0.1 indicates that the peak locking eect is acceptable. The peak lock value is calculated from the center of mass of the V mod.0.5 histogram: peak lock = 4 (0.25 centerof mass). Since there is more or less a equipartition of the decimal places the center of mass should be close to 0.25, when there is a high peak locking eect due to small particles etc. the center of mass is shifted to zero. 163

9 Image and Vector Display

Slot resolution: Using the slider one can determine the slot resolution for display. The width of one bin can be selected within a range of 1/30 px-3 px. Number of vectors: Shows how many vectors were used to calculate PDF. Number of bins: Shows how many bins are used for display (number of bins = reciprocal value of slot resolution).

9.5.5

External Window

This window (gure 9.27) is opened outside of the DaVis main task window and maximized to full screen. So the window can easily be moved to the second screen of a dual graphic interface and displayed on a second monitor or by a beamer. This special window is not available in every project. The display includes the simple (2D) image only, without of scales, proles and color palettes.

Figure 9.27: External Image Window

9.5.6

3D Prole Views

The window of gure 9.28 displays a simple 3D image of the active buer. The intensity is shown in the z-direction and in the usual false color code. With the scroll bars an image can be rotated around its center: the vertical bar moves the front up and down, the horizontal bar moves the front to the left and right. After having entered a new intensity range, press the Return key to update the display. Another way to dene the range is using the Image card of the Image Display Attributes dialog. 164

9.5 View Types

Figure 9.28: Simple 3D Prole

9.5.7

Spreadsheet View

A spreadsheet view (see gure 9.29) displays the raw and unscaled intensity values of every pixel in a table arrangement. This view uses the same resolution, gamma and color table settings as the simple 2D windows, which can be changed in the Image card of the Image Display Attributes dialog (see page 138).

Figure 9.29: Spreadsheet View Click onto a pixel eld with the left mouse button to display this pixel intensity in the edit item in the bottom line. Here the value can be changed directly. In DaVis Classic the key combinations CTRL and one of the cursor keys (up, down, left, right) can be used to move the cursor and activate another pixel. A special exporting mode is available via the context menu: Export as ascii table creates a ascii le for further processing by Microsoft Excel or other 165

9 Image and Vector Display

programs. The le includes all column heads, if dened by the display functions, and a table of buer intensities.

9.6
9.6.1

OpenGL (3D) Windows

Introduction

Image buers and vector buers can be displayed in 3D. The window of gure 9.30 displays a simple 3D image of the active buer.

Figure 9.30: OpenGL (3D) View

For images the intensity is interpreted as height information (although the source for the height information can also be e.g. taken from a scalar component of the buer - see proper section down below), for 3D vectors the third component Vz is made visible. 166

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

A 3D view is opened when selecting the corresponding entry Open 3D View in the context menu available when clicking into a window with the right mouse button:

9.6.2

User interaction to change 3D scene via mouse/keyboard

The left mouse button (together with the keys CTRL, ALT, SHIFT) is used to adapt the view onto the objects in the 3D scene. The following table summarizes the combinations and eect on the 3D window: key mouse action click+drag eect depending if the click was inside or outside the area covered by the navigation sphere: inside: rotation of the whole scene in the direction (x/y) indicated by the mouse movement outside: rotation of the whole scene clock- or anticlockwise (z) as indicated by the mouse movement the same as click+drag without ALTkey, but the rotation is continued until the next click is made translation of the whole scene in the x- and y- direction zoom in/out of the whole scene (translation in z-direction) CRTL + cursor (+ SHIFT = slower) cursor up/down (+ SHIFT = slower) mouse wheel up/down (+ SHIFT = slower) alternative shortcut -

ALT

click+drag

CTRL click+drag SHIFT click+drag up / down

167

9 Image and Vector Display

9.6.3

Data and display properties

The following section describe the parameters that can be set to arrange the 3D view to your needs. This includes global settings like object visibility, lighting, transparency as well as settings available for each single object type (e.g. how vector arrows are drawn). These settings are grouped in the 3D Scene - list of objects card (and its subcards) of the data and display properties dialog available in the context menu of each (3D) window. In the data and display properties of a 3D window there are additional entries that dene the appearance of the 3D scene as well as the standard entries for images / vector elds. For those standard entries see the corresponding sections in the chapter Image windows. The following sections will describe all available settings for the 3D scene. PLease note that not all settings are always available (e.g. vector arrow card is disabled for images).

List of objects In the top card of the 3D parameters 3D scene - list of objects you select which objects are visible in the scene:

The entries are: show scalar buer data: For images this means the image data itself. For vector elds this switches on the vector background. 168

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

show vectors: For vector elds this switches on the vector arrows. For Images this is not available. show bounding box: This object shows the minimum and maximum extension of the object by an enclosing bounding box. By default the center of the bounding box is the center for rotation. show coordinate axis: This object shows the scaled axis with numbers and / or a grid shown in the background (bottom/top and left/right and front/back) to see the scale ticks mr easily. show buer projection: This object shows the maximum value projected along the x- and y-axis projected onto the background walls (left/right and front/back). show side walls at image border: This object completes the side of the surface down to the minimum value. show objects of Overlay3D: This object contains all user dened objects dened in the buer attribute Overlay3D (see section 9.6.4). show navigation sphere: This object appears only while the left mouse button is down and helps to orient the user in the 3D movement of the object. 3D scene - global parameters In this card parameters that eect the whole scene (all objects) are set:

The entries are: Memory usage: Here you dene the amount of memory that you are willing to grant the window to handle the 3D scene. The higher the value the nicer the objects (and the slower the overall performance) 169

9 Image and Vector Display

Favor spatial resolution / mapped colors: Here you dene the amount of memory you would like to use to model the 3D surface of the objects (number of polygon elements) and to map the color information on it. A higher spatial resolution leads to smoother objects, a higher memory amount for mapped colors leads to a ner surface texturing.

3D Objects are wire frame model / solid face model: switching to wire frame model shows the single polygon elements - good to check if the model has enough sample points to describe all gradients well enough switching to solid face model (default) shows the textured 3D surfaces.

Background color of scene : here the background color of the scene is selected. The default color depends on your current Microsoft Window color scheme.

3D projection scheme: It is possible to switch between orthogonal projection where parallel lines stay parallel (default) and perspective projection where parallel lines meet in one point (see screenshot below). You can also switch between the two projection schemes pressing the P key on your keyboard.

Standard views: Her you can arrange the scene for the six aligned viewing directions Front Back Left Right Top Bottom and for the default 3D view Standard which is looking at an x and yangle of 45o

Mouse interaction: here you can invert the rotation direction (checking the box will turn the eye rather than a oating object in front of a xed eye). Furthermore you can

Lock x, y, z: That is the angle will be xed so that in any movement of the mouse in order to turn the object the specied direction will be ignored (e.g. for Lock x it is only possible to move the object up and down and (anti)clockwise around z). 170

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

Source for height and color Ususally you would use the same information (e.g. image intensity) for z-height and coloring. But it is possible to select dierent sources for height information and coloring the 3D surface.

Either you take that information from the buer data itself or from a scalar component stored in the buer (e.g. LaVision StrainMaster 3D system) or from a scalar quantity stored in a source set of your Davis project. In the latter case there are 3 possibilities to map the pattern of that source buer to the surface take the raw source image as it is as texture to color the 3D surface correct the source image using the image correction for z=0mm before using it as texture to color the 3D surface 171

9 Image and Vector Display

correct the source image using the current buer in the image correction as height information before using it as texture to color the 3D surface The next screenshots illustrates some examples: In the rst example the source for height is the proper buer (top) the texture is taken from the raw source (unprocessed) image (bottom) and vice versa please compare this to the example screenshot at the beginning of the OpenGl (3D) view chapter:

height

color

height

color

In the second example the source for height is the scalar component Height (left) the vector arrow coloring is taken from the proper buer (right) as would be the case in a StrainMaster 3D system:

height

color 172

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

In last example the source for height is the proper buer (left) the texture is taken from the source (camera) image corrected with the proper buer z(x,y) (right) as would be the case in a StrainMaster 3D system:

height

color

Furthermore you can specify the transparency of scalar data and vector arrows:

Transparency Images : this is the transparency of scalar data objects ( see-through / solid ) Transparency Vector arrows: this is the transparency of vector arrows ( see-through / solid )

For images you can specify threshholds. All pixels holding an intensity outside the given range will be totally transparent (invisible).

Surface height mapping By default the 3D scene is displayed with a stretching factor in z so that it ts nicely into a equilateral bounding box (width = height = depth). Only in the case if the I-scale factor equals the X scale factor and both I- and X-units are the same (e.g. mm) the intensity is interpreted as absolute height values without additional stretching factor to guarantee absolute proportions this is important e.g. for calculated surfaces in the StrainMaster 3D project. 173

9 Image and Vector Display

An additional height stretching can be applied to the scene to exaggerate / suppress the expansion of the z-dimension. The default is 1. The slider allows an additional factor of 0 to 10. Pressing the button labeled Set = 1 resets the slider to the default value of 1. Light sources Here light sources can be switched on and o.

While the rst two light sources add ooding light from all directions making the lighting brighter, the other four light sources are directional light beams from the left / top / right / front illuminating the corresponding side of the objects and casting shadows on the opposite side. Usually you get the best 3D impression for your scene when selecting just one of the left,top,right,front lights plus one or two ambient lights to adust the general brightness. Deselecting all will disabling lighting mode, the resulting surfaces looks at without depth. Vector arrows In this card the appearence of vctor arrows in 3D can be adjusted. 174

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

To see the Vz component of vectors better this component can be exaggerated with a user dened factor ranging from 0 to 10. Pressing the button labeled Set = 1 resets the slider to the default value of 1. The same can be done with for the vector length in contrast to the further option this will eect all components Vx , Vy , Vz the same. The last group of options changes the appearance of vectors. Vector arrows can be displayed as vector arrows or as distorted grid which simply connects neighboring vector arrow tips. Sometimes this is a good means to visualize shear and turbulent zones in a ow / deformation eld. In case the vector appearance is set to vector arrows there are four dierent modes to draw the arrow heads. Either you draw vector arrows proportional to the vector length. This leads to large arrow heads for large arrows (option 1) or you have arrow head all of the same size. The default size (factor of 1) is calculated automatically from the maximum (longest) vector (option 2), or the overall average vector in the vector eld (option 3) or as 1/20 the size of the distance of two vectors (vector grid) which is independent of vector values (option 4). Again this precomputed vector head size can be adjusted by an additional factor using the slider values >1 make the vector heads bigger while values <1 make them smaller. The button Set = 1 resets the factor to the default value of 1.

Coordinate system In this card the appearance of the coordinate axis can be adjusted. 175

9 Image and Vector Display

In the upper row the color of scale numbers and axis grid can be selected and if only the grid, only the scale numbers or both is visible. Depending on that choice further options are available below. For each axis (x, y and z) the writing direction of the numbers can be chosen (reading left to right in x-direction or in the opposite x-direction or along the y and z direction respectively. Having dened the writing direction the face normal has to be adjusted e.g. for a number written left to right along the positive x-axis the face normal of the number may point towards the positive or negative y- or z-axis. Finally one of the four axis positions have to be chosen for each axis where the numbers are written to e.g. for the z axis the position can be front left or front right or back left or back right. Again there is the posibility to enlarge or decrease the size of the scale numbers by a factor using the slider. Pressing Set = 1 resets the scale number size to the default size (factor of 1). Please note that changing the size of the numbers may change the numbers of ticks on the scale as more or less space is required to write the numbers. Also writing the scale numbers along the axis requires mor space than chosing a writing direction perpendicular to it. Another factor adjust the width of the grid drawn in the background of the buer to make it easier to identify the position of ticks inside the volume.

Multi frame parameter If a buer has more than one frame all of them or just one can be displayed in the scene. If all frames are to be shown you can further specify the relative positioning among them: 176

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

In the radio group you specify the relation of the dierent frames. The rst three options pile all frames on a rigid stack equidistantly next to / above / on top of each other. Any rotation rotates the whole pile as a single object (see left image). The distance of the single frame objects in this pile is determined by size of the scene multiplied by the factor specied below. The default is 1.5 to clearly separate the objects one from the other and can be changed by the slider or reset to its default by pressing Set to 1.5.

rigid x-stack

xed horizontal setup

The fourth option determines the absolute positioning according to the buers frame scaling e.g. as in the SprayMaster or Tomographic PIV project where the (known) equidistant scan positions are written to the frame scale of the buer. The last two options place the single frames next to / on top of of each other. In these modes their positions stay xed and any rotation is applied to each of the objects without moving them. This is a nice way to compare similar data, as it gives an unobstructed view to all frames at once looking from an arbitrary angle (see right image). 177

9 Image and Vector Display

9.6.4

Programming the 3D view with (additional) user dened objects in CL

It is possible to add your own user dened objects to the 3D scene via CL macro commands. The interface is the function:

int OpenGL_AddNewOverlay3D_version1( int buffer, int isVisibleInFrame, int isVisibleInZ, int theType, line scale, line transl_before_rotation, line rotation, line translation, line rgba, string text );

The parameters are (line is a oat array): 178

9.6 OpenGL (3D) Windows

Paraneter int buer int isVisibleInFrame int isVisibleInZ int theType

Decscription buer number holding the buer if =-1 it is visible in all frames, else only in the specied frame (0 . . . N F 1) if =-1 it is visible in all z-planes, else only in the specied z-plane (0 . . . N Z 1) is one of the following object types: OBJ_CUBE (axis along x, y and z), OBJ_CYLINDER (axis along z), OBJ_SPHERE (which is modeled as a dodekaeder) OBJ_CAMERA (camera looking along z), OBJ_CONE (axis along z) or OBJ_TEXT (writing direction along x facing towards z) {x,y,z} are the factors to scale the object (which is initially aligned along the x, y and z-axis) {dx,dy,dz} the unrotated object is moved to this position {dx,dy,dz}. This enables the user to build groups of objects. {Rx ,Ry ,Rz } are angles in degrees. The object is rotated now rst around the x-axis with the angle Rx then around y with Ry degrees, nally Rz around the z axis. {dx,dy,dz} the (now rotated object) is moved (further) to this position {dx,dy,dz}. This way whole rotated groups of objects can be moved around the scene. {R,G,B, T } is the object surface color in RGB (each ranging from 0 . . . 1) and transparency (0=see-trhough, 1=solid). This last parameter only applies for the object OBJ_CAMERA and is typically a number 1 to 6 and for the object OBJ_TEXT which holds the text to be written starting at the specied position.
continued on next page

line scale line transl_before_rotation line rotation

line translation

line rgba string text

179

9 Image and Vector Display

Paraneter

Decscription

The following function creates an example 3D scene. The CL-code for this function can be found in OpenGL.cl in your DaVis folder cl/system/display): int OpenGL_AddTestObjectsToOverlay3D_version1( int buffer )

Here buer is a free buer in the buer list (buer will be overwritten). After calling the function the buer can be viewed in 3D. Please note that in order to see the objects you may have to switch on the show 3D-objects check box in the top 3D- parameter card of the data and display properties dialog. You should see something like the following showing an example for each object type:

9.7

Prole Windows

A prole view of a buer is a 2D-plot of an intensity array at equidistant horizontal positions, when the intensity gives the vertical position (see gure 9.31). The prole views are displayed in special prole windows with scaling information to the left and below the prole, with dierent display options (lines, bars and more), in logarithm grid, and with additional buttons to change the displayed range. Special plots can be painted in a prole view for data arrays with free horizontal positions. This plots are not accessible for the user by simple selection of a buer view, the plots have to be created and setup by dialogs for special usage. 180

9.7 Prole Windows

9.7.1

About the Prole Window

A prole can be taken from any image buer horizontally or vertically and in dierent modes (single lines, average or sum) as well as on a circle border. If a prole is taken from a vector buer any component or the vector length can be extracted. It is possible to store proles as ASCII les (letype PRF) and load those les back into the prole buer. Each prole can be accessed and modied via menu item Macro Execute command line (or press the F7 key in DaVis Classic mode) e.g. to perform mathematical operations: For example B[4]=P[2] or the short form B4=P[2] will copy the second prole into buer 4. More descriptions can be found in the Command Language Manual. In DaVis Classic up to twenty proles (numbers 0 to 19) can be used freely. This set of proles is stored in buer 0 internally.

Figure 9.31: The prole window.

Open Prole View In DaVis Project mode the prole source must be managed by the dialogs, but in most cases the user can switch easily from an image view to the prole view with the right mouse button and context menu. In DaVis Classic the prole buer can be opened from button Proles in the toolbar or by selecting open prole view in the context menu of any buer. The Active Prole While more proles can be displayed above each other in the same view in dierent colors, only one prole can be active. The intensity of this active prole is displayed when moving the mouse above the view. The minimum 181

9 Image and Vector Display

and maximum intensity of the active prole are used to calculate an optimal display range. Into the active prole a new prole is taken or loaded, and it will be saved by default when pressing the Save button. The selection of the active prole is done either in the list box or by pressing the button + and below the box to switch to the next or previous prole. If necessary the list of available proles is enlarged up to a maximum of 20 proles. The entries indicate the number of the Prole (Pr. 1 ... Pr. 20), the color e.g: (red) or (blue) and empty- if no data has been stored for this prole so far. Buer Prole In DaVis Classic the menu function Buer View Prole opens a prole view of the active buer. By default this online view displays a horizontal prole. Another way to open this view is clicking with the right mouse button inside an image and selecting the Open Prole View item. In DaVis Projects a buer prole is displayed always when switching to the prole view via context menu. A buer prole is immediately repainted when the values of the active buer change. In contrast to the general prole display no Active Prole can be selected here. Because the prole data is taken directly from the buer and calculated on the y using an internal temporary prole. This will be replaced, if another prole is taken. Comparing of proles is impossible unless the Project dialog gives some functions to do this. Scales of the prole buer Whenever a prole is taken from an image buer, the scales of the buer are transferred to the prole. The prole buer stores only one set of scales for all prole lines! This means, that the previous scales of proles are overwritten by the new ones. See section Scales for more information. Get discrete or interpolated values Prole values change from one pixel to the next in discrete steps. When the mouse cursor is placed on the prole, these discrete values are given in the status line (bottom right of the screen). The displayed prole line is linear interpolated between two discrete pixel values. These interpolated values are displayed in the status line when the mouse is moved on the view and the CTRL key is pressed at the same time. 182

9.7 Prole Windows

9.7.2

Functions of the Prole Window

The prole window contains the following buttons: Show displays the original image and the line (or range) inside it from which the active prole has been taken. If the prole has been averaged or summed, the range is indicated by its border lines. Stats computes some statistics from the active prole. The results are shown in the info window. Save: Proles can be stored to les row by row after pressing the storage button. Possible le types are the DaVis prole type PRF, the multi column prole PRM to be read e.g. by Excel, the standard image le type IM7 and text format TXT. The prole le types are described in detail on page 121. You can also store proles with Copy as Table in the Edit Menu. The prole window as currently displayed can be stored to the clipboard as bitmap with shortcut CTRL+C. Settings opens card Proles in the Data and Display Attributes dialog, which allows to change the appearence of the prole (see below). This dialog can also be accessed by clicking the right mouse button inside the Prole window and then selecting the rst item in the context menu. For all other functions of the context menu see page 157. / : Load or save the active prole into a PRF le. Before saving the user is asked for the range of proles to be stored, if more than one prole is displayed.

Take prole: Takes a prole (see below), select e.g. a line in the source buer. Delete / Del All: Delete the active prole or all stored proles. This buttons are available only when working on the prole buer. Active Prole / + / -: Change the active prole (see below). Change visible ranges The visible ranges of the horizontal and vertical axis of the prole can be changed in the Data and Display Attributes dialog and with the help of the following buttons in the prole window: 183

9 Image and Vector Display

Move prole left and right. Move prole up and down. Decrease / increase horizontal range. Decrease / Increase vertical range. Optimal horizontal or vertical range. The whole prole becomes visible. If more than one prole is displayed, only the active prole is adjusted. Set horizontal / vertical scale by numerical input. Select a horizontal range with the mouse: Press the left mouse button at both border points. The new range will be displayed immediately. The visible range is scanned (up/down or left/right) without changing its extension with the cursor keys on the keyboard.

9.7.3

Prole Display Settings

When pressing the right mouse button inside the prole window the context menu is displayed and the rst item opens the setup dialog (see gure 9.32). Here the user can select which scales to show, if the scales should be logarithm and if the grid should be displayed. The unit of the vertical scale is written by default from top to bottom with the characters below each other, but can be written rotated. The following display modes are available: lines (interpolate linear lines between the points), dots (paint the given points only), lled (ll the space between the x-scale and the lines), bars (paint bars, centered to the point position), crosses (paint a cross for each pixel) or lines+dots (linear lines between the points and thicker dots at the points). In mode bars the width of the bars can be dened by a value between 50 percent and 100 percent of the distance between neighboured points. In line mode the line width can be changed in the range of 1 to 10 pixel. The Background color is white by default but can be changed to one out of 16 predened colors. The Scale color uses the system dialog color by default (gray on most systems), but cah be changed to a predened color. The Controls (buttons, active prole selection, ...) and the scrollbars can be hidden to increase the size of the prole view in the window. 184

9.7 Prole Windows

Figure 9.32: Data and Display Attributes dialog: prole display settings. If Rotated Intensity Label is selected, the text is written rotated from bottom to top. Otherwise the characters are painted above each other from top to bottom. If the prole is programmed to display additional information as overlay, the Overlay Display can be enabled or disabled. Show Info adds some basic information inside the prole window in a small box in the upper right area: prole number taken from rows (R) or columns (C), arbitrary line (L) or circle/ellipse (E) source buer line range of averaging or summing. Button As Default denes the setting as default to be used when opening a new prole window. Horizontal and Vertical Range of Prole Display The visible range of the prole can be entered for the horizontal and vertical (intensity) axis (see gure 9.33). Both ranges can be given in xed scaled values, or the range can be calculated automatically when opening a prole view (0-max, min-max, max). Those range settings can be stored as default values to be used when opening a prole view. The range settings are dierent for standard proles and for plots: It is possible to dene dierent default ranges for both view types. 185

9 Image and Vector Display

Figure 9.33: Data and Display Attributes dialog: prole range settings.

9.7.4

Take a new Prole

The displayed prole can be changed in dialog Take Prole (see gure 9.34). When working on the prole buer in DaVis Classic, the new prole can be taken from a freely selectable source buer. If a prole is displayed for a normal buer, the new prole can be extracted only from this buer, and it is impossible to mix proles of dierent buers.

Figure 9.34: Data and Display Attributes dialog: prole settings. Proles can be taken in Modes horizontaly (from rows) or verticaly (from columns). Unless it is further specied, such a prole simply corresponds to the intensities of a single row or column. In the other modes the prole consists of the average values (range-avg) or the sum (range-sum) over a certain range of lines. In the mode arbitrary line a line at any angle and position can be chosen. In this mode the resulting pixel values along the line are computed by interpolating the closest four neighbouring pixels. In mode circle the user denes the center position and the radius of the circle. All (interpolated) pixel 186

9.8 Export of a View

on the circle are taken clockwise from the right side of the circle. Mode intensity histogram calculates a histogram of the quantity of pixels for all intensity values of the complete source buer. For vector buers a vector prole is calculated for the vector length or for the vector components (X, Y or Z). Take prole of line/circle/lines: The user can enter the range in pixel directly in the text items left to the button. Depending on the mode some dierent edit items are displayed, e.g. the coordinates of the rst and last point of a line, or the center coordinates and the radius of a circle. After entering the coordinates, the prole can be taken by pressing the button. The Active Prole is the number of the prole to store the selected line. The text empty- beside the selected number indicates that this prole does not yet contain any data. The user can Take a Prole by mouse directly inside the original image window of the source buer after having clicked this button. When the image window of the source buer is opened, select the borders of the range with the mouse by clicking once on each border position. In the mode arbitrary line, the line is dened by two mouse clicks (start position and end position of the line). In mode circle press the mouse button on the center of the circle, then move the mouse to dene the radius and select the desired radius by another mouse click. By default only a single prole is taken: the selected prole and nothing else. Sometimes multi proles are useful to compare dierent lines of the source buer. Therefore select the number of proles to be taken and select the equidistant pixel distance (dy) between those proles. Press button Close to close this dialog without modifying any prole or to nish the prole selection.

9.8

Export of a View

The Export submenus in the File menu give access to dierent possibilities of copying data from DaVis into another program. The main dierence between the exporting functions is the data and display export. The export of buer raw data is independent of the screen display. This description can be found in chapter Buer Input and Output on page 281. On the other hand the export of a displayed view is something like a screenshot. All this functions are available via a tool bar button, which opens the dialog Export a Buer or Window. Another useful function for presentations is the export of an AVI movie. 187

9 Image and Vector Display

9.8.1

Export to Clipboard

Buer as ASCII Table to Clipboard The text or data transfer in the ASCII format is especially useful from the prole window, info window and from the spreadsheet view of a data buer. This way, e.g., image data can directly be transferred to Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet programs. In dialog Global Options (page 47) the user can select between the decimal "point" and "comma" characters. Note, that for 2D buers the active rectangular region is exported. In the info window the text should be marked with the mouse, then press the keys CTRL+C or use the context menu on the right mouse button to copy the text to the Windows clipboard.

Copy Screen The whole contents of the screen is transferred to the clipboard by pressing the key PRINT. The contents of the task window (the window running DaVis) is transferred by pressing ALT+PRINT keys. Both functions are standard Windows functions and can be used in most programs.

Bitmaps The contents of the active image window is copied to the clipboard in the Windows bitmap format by pressing the standard shortcut CTRL+C. After having changed to another Windows application the bitmap is inserted by pressing the standard shortcut CTRL+V. The contents of a prole window and of dialog boxes can be transferred in the same way. DaVis supports a mode for copying the client area only or for the complete window including titel bar and border. See chapter on Global Options on page 47 for further descriptions.

9.8.2

Export to File

Export a Buer or Window The Export dialog (see gure 9.35) gives access to all export functions. The upper part can be used to export the raw data of the active buer into a le or as a spreadsheet table into the clipboard. The larger lower part lists all the dierent possibilities to save or print the active view of a buer (the buer window) with all options. 188

9.8 Export of a View

Save Window as Bitmap This Export function can be used to save the complete window as displayed on screen, including all scales and palettes and the vector background image. The supported le formats, which must be selected in the le select box after clicking onto item Export Window in the window context menu, are BMP for standard bitmaps, JPEG for lossy bitmaps but small les, and Postscript (PS) for vector graphics.

Figure 9.35: Dialog for exporting of raw data or of a displayed window. Both bitmap formats can either export a screenshot (a copy of the color information in the graphic display adapter) or an enlarged bitmap with a factor between 1 (original size) and 10 in each direction (width and height, so the nal bitmap has for factor 2 a size 2x2 of the displayed size). For a screenshot the image window must be visible completely, all hidden areas are saved in black color! Enlarged bitmaps are useful for presentations. They create a better resolution of the scale texts and of the vectors compared to the screenshot. The image information itself is enlarged but not interpolated. If the resulting bitmap becomes larger than 10 MB, a warning message is given. We can not guarantee the correct creation of very large bitmap les with some ten megabytes, because this export depends on the hardware parameters of your PC (main memory). For lossy JPG exports the quality of the resulting le can be dened as a value between 1 and 100 percent. For more information about this value please refer to the JPG denition. A quality of 100 percent is not lossless, and a value of 33 percent does not create a le with a size of one third of a lossless le. A very good value is 75 percent. For the postscript export the above shown dialog resizes and includes all postscript options. This options are described in detail on page 51. 189

9 Image and Vector Display

9.8.3

Export AVI Movie

The dialog of gure 9.36 stores a series of images in the Windows movie format AVI. The image source can be a range of buers in memory, les from a DaVis set, simple les, frames from one buer or even images acquired from a camera. The images can be exported in the standard order from the rst to the last image (increment) or in a backward order (decrement).

Figure 9.36: Dialog for creation of AVI movies.

AVI Buer View Press button Test View to show the rst image of the selected source on screen. Then dene the view of your image: set a zoom to resize the window, select a colortable and a resolution, edit the Image Display Attributes (proles, colorbar, scales, and dont forget to set them as default!). If there is an overlay graphic dened for the buers and included as a buer attribute, the overlay can be painted when selecting show overlay graphics. If you want to create an AVI movie of proles or 3D-OpenGL-displays, you have to select the view type. It is even possible to call a user dened macro to change the view while exporting the movie. When selecting execute command the CL-command will be called after loading every single image into memory and showing it on screen. Use the CL-variable ActiveWindow to paint something on the image window before storing it in the AVI le, e.g. use subroutine WinDrawText to show an overlayed text. The so arranged view will be used as layout for all images of the movie. 190

9.8 Export of a View

AVI Creation Dene the speed of the movie by parameter frames per sec. The standard Windows AVI player is not able to play an AVI movie in another speed. You may need a special program to play in a user dened speed or in a single step mode. Press button Create AVI to start the creation of an AVI le with the entered path and name. Button Select opens a leselectbox to dene the le name. After pressing Create AVI the rst source image will be shown on screen in the selected view mode. If the compression mode is set to value select in dialog, the following Windows dialog opens to select between all installed compression modes and special parameters. In the DaVis AVI dialog only a small number of modes are available: The uncompressed mode creates an AVI le of the size (plus overhead) (N images) * (size of one image in BMP format). In the modes Microsoft Video 1, Microsoft RLE and Indeo the quality of the resulting AVI le can be dened with a percentage value.

Figure 9.37: Dialog for selection of AVI compression. After pressing OK the export starts. All images are shown on screen. The recent number is displayed in the status line. Please dont start any action on your PC while the export function is running! After nalizing the AVI le DaVis switches of the Stop button in the toolbar and closes the test image window. During the export the buers are displayed on screen in the dened window with the active display parameters. In enlarging mode screenshot the AVI export is nothing else as a number of stored screenshots. If the user is moving some other programs to the front during the export, the screenshots are created from the wrong windows, and the movie does not include the correct data. So, if the user uses this way of creating AVI movies, no other operations with the PC are allowed during the export, not even a screensaver should be started. To avoid this problems, the creation of AVI movies can be moved into internal (not displayed) windows with command AVI_Screenshots=0 or when using a enlarging factor of 1 or larger. This mode is used by default for all exports 191

9 Image and Vector Display

of the the simple image display, but is not available for proles or 3D/OpenGL windows yet.

9.9

Correlation Map

To open the Correlation map dialog of gure 9.38 use the right mouse button on an image and select the Send to/Correlation map option.

Figure 9.38: Correlation Map dialog On the top of the dialog you nd the Correlation parameter and the Vector component values, on the bottom left the particle image that is used as the source for the correlation and on the bottom right the correlation function at the certain position determined by the cursor on the particle image. When the cursor is moved on the particle image while the Switch mouse selection on/o ag is o the correlation is recalculated automatically for the specied Correlation window size at the Correlation window position in pixel determined by the cursor position on the particle image and the result of the correlation is updated. The left mouse button can be used to set the Switch mouse selection on/o ag, now the position of the correlation window is xed and by moving the cursor on the correlation the correlation height is determined and shown in the status line together with the cursor position (scaled or in pixel coordinates when you keep the SHIFT button on the keyboard pressed). 192

9.9 Correlation Map

Switch mouse selection on/o: When the ag is o the correlation map is updated automatically when the cursor is moved on the particle image. Correlation window position: Shows the center position of the interrogation window depending on the cursor position on the particle image. Correlation window size: Determines the correlation window size for the currently executed correlation. Vector eld was created using image correction: Determines if the calculation of the correlation is taking image correction into account or not. Vector component values: Shows the position of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th choice vector in [mm] for x- and y-component. disabled: not used for correlation map.

193

9 Image and Vector Display

194

10 Recording
The Recording dialog can be reached using the New Recording button in the Project Manager. This is the main dialog for image acquisition. Furthermore all available processing functions can be applied to the acquired images by batch after the image acquisition is completed.

10.1

Window Manager

In the top left corner you nd the Window Manager that may be used for image display conguration. A suitable array of images (vertical horizontal) may be selected using the Layout textbox within the range 1 1 up to 2 2. The button may be used to optimize the resolution of the CLUT for all visible windows, it sets the color to 0 . . . max. The button may be used to maximize the size for all visible windows. With a click on an image the corresponding image slot is highlighted, i.e. the label of the active image becomes blue. The image type that is displayed at this position may be selected using the radiobuttons in the Window Manager from following options: Camera Image: The last aquired image using the Take or Grab button. 195

10 Recording

Processed Image: The last resulting image/vector after executing the batch processing list. Recorded Dataset: The last recorded dataset. Statistics: Statistical information are displayed and updated for the active image view. See page 110 for more details on the statistics dialog, which is equal to the statistics of the Data and Display Attributes dialog. AOI Monitor: When working in the Interactive Mode the intensity level of some rectangular areas or of some device data can be displayed in prole style. Details on this dialog are given on page 214. Device Data: This option shows a dialog with the current device data (only available if some device is initialized to store device data information). See page 74 for the setup of such devices. Dispatcher Check: If DaVis is started as remote master and the user selects the Recording and Realtime Dispatching acquisition item (see DaVis Remote Control manual), then the dispatching state can be controlled with this dialog during the recording.

10.2

Interactive Mode

Before starting a new recording the interactive mode can be used for checking the system and adjustment of the cameras. Additionaly the AOI Monitor can be displayed to check the intensities of restricted image areas. Take/Grab: Take one or several images. Here you can check if the cameras are connected correctly to your computer and are operational, if the exposure time and sharpness of your camera have to be (re)adjusted and if the light sources are positioned well. During grabbing you can use the Hotkey mode to change parameters (see page 216 for a detailed description). Processing after Take/Grab: Applies the current Batch Processing list to the camera images.

10.3

Settings

The following buttons can be used to show the respective settings in the lower part of the screen: 196

10.4 Recording Sequence

Button

Description Change the Camera and Device settings, e.g. exposure time, trigger mode, laser settings. Change the Acquisition Sequence items and/or parameters, e.g. change the number of images you want to record. Change the operations of the active Batch Processing list.

Table 10.1: Camera, Acquisition and Processing Settings.

10.4

Recording Sequence

When you are satises with the single images you may start to prepare a new recording. Therefor you have to check the Recording Sequence which is executed after pressing the Start Recording button. Press the to show the Recording Sequence in the lower part of the screen: button

The treeview on the left side shows the active sequence. Using the administration buttons in the upper part of the dialog the user is able to change this sequence or to load/save it from/to le. Activating an item in the treeview will open the corresponding parameter card which can be used to change the settings of this item.

197

10 Recording

Button

Description Add a new acquisition item after the active item in the acquisition tree. Add a new subitem under the active Scan item in the acquisition tree. Delete the active item.

Load an acquisition sequence from le.

Save the current acquisition sequence to le.

Table 10.2: Acquisition Sequence administration buttons.

The hierarchically arranged sequence is processed from top to bottom. We dier between the normal items and the so called Scan items which can be identied by the bitmap in the treeview. Only these items are able to execute other items during their execution. This can be done by adding a new item as subitem under the Scan item. See the following examples to understand how the acquisition sequence works. Refer to chapter Acquisition Sequence items for a detailed description of all items.

This picture shows a standard Image Acquisition sequence without any scan items. After pressing the Start Recording button the item takes the specied number of images. The number of images and the store mode can be changed in the corresponding parameter card.

The sequence is expanded by user dened CL commands which are executed before and after the Image Acquisition. These commands can be used to execute your own macros and/or to control external devices.

198

10.5 General Recording Options

This sequence contains a scan item (x-axis, for example: start 10 mm, end 100 mm, increment 10 mm) and the Image Acquisition item. After each increment and movement of the stage the sequence executes the Image Acquisition. This sequence creates 10 datasets (10 mm - 100 mm) with n images.

10.5

General Recording Options

Using the General Recording Options you can choose the recording mode (Use RAM/Online storage) and the path and name of the recordings. The dialog can be opened by selecting the rst item (Recording sequence) in the treeview:

First you have to choose the recording mode: Use RAM: All images will be stored in PC or camera memory rst (depending on the camera type). This mode can be used to acquire images with the maximum repetition rate of the cameras. Note: The maximum number of images is limited by the PC or camera memory. If Store immediately after recording is enabled the images will be copied to hard disc after the acquisition of one recording (Set). Otherwise you can use the Store now button after the recording is nished to store the les to hard disc. Online storage (Use RAM = o ): The main dierence compared to mode Use RAM is the possibility to acquire and store images for a long 199

10 Recording

time and use the complete capacity of the hard disc. Note that special hard disc devices may be needed to reach the maximum repetition rate. Mode Use RAM and the image display will be disabled when using this function. If the PC has more than one CPU (or Hyperthreading is enabled) the image acquisition and data storage is executed using dierent threads to receive an image from the camera and to store the image on hard disc. Internally the images are acquired into the PC memory in a ring of buers. Everytime the acquisition thread nishes the receiving of an image, the storage thread takes the image from memory and stores the data on hard disc. While the storage is executed, the acquisition threads asks the camera for the next image. See chapter Fast Data Acquisition and Online Storage on page 209) for a detailed description of this mode.

With the Store images item the destination of data storage can be dened. Choose between O, Default or Specify. With O no storage will be done, Default stores the images in a DaVis dataset with the name set to: "Cam_<date>_<time>" (date: current date, time: current time). Specify stores the images in a DaVis dataset with the name you specify. You are allowed to use <date> and <time> in your set lenames as well. They will be replaced by the date and time when the rst image is stored to the hard disk. Use the Store in folder checkbox to specify a destination folder within the current project.

10.6
10.6.1

Recording Sequence items

Image Acquisition

The Image Acquisition item of gure 10.1 is the default item for acquisition and storage of images. Select the maximum number of images to be recorded in the text item Number of images. Enabling Show images while recording will display the images during the acquisition process (not available in Use RAM mode). But caution: This takes time and reduces the acquisition rate of the system. In case you want to obtain maximum repetition rate switch o the image display. With help of the Start/end condition the image acquisition can start/end with an external trigger or keystroke. This trigger signal (TTL-signal with 200

10.6 Recording Sequence items

Figure 10.1: Standard item for image acquisition.

rising edge 0V5V, width > 200 s) must be connected to the specied port of the PTU or TTL I/O connector (see chapter about PTU). The following conditions are available: Immediately after pressing the Start Recording button. Trigger rst image: After a trigger is detected at the specied trigger input. An extra delay between the detected trigger and the image acquisition may be specied in the Wait extra delay textbox. Trigger last image: With this it is possible to acquire n (Number of images) images just before a trigger is detected. The acquisition starts after pressing the Start Recording button. The images are stored in a ring buer until a trigger is detected at the specied trigger input. Trigger image #: This mode can be used to acquire a specied number of images just before and after a trigger is detected. The camera starts recording images to the memory continuously (ring memory). If the memory is full it overwrites the rst recorded images (endless). After an external event trigger was received the camera records images so that the selected number before the trigger are not overwritten. CL commands The card CL commmands (gure 10.2) can be used to dene CL commands which will be executed before/during/after image recording. 201

10 Recording

Figure 10.2: Execute CL commands during recording.

Note: The During CL command is executed after each image acquisition and cannot be combined with the Use RAM option. In the online storage mode (Use RAM = OFF) it may decrease the acquisition rate.

10.6.2

Reference time

The Reference time scan item (gure 10.3) is available on systems with a PTU (Programmable Timing Unit). It can be used to scan the time between an external trigger and the image acquisition (trigger mode external cyclic or external random):

Figure 10.3: Reference time scan.

202

10.6 Recording Sequence items

10.6.3

Reference time dt

The Reference time dt scan item (gure 10.4) is available on systems with a PTU (Programmable Timing Unit) and a camera with double frame mode.

Figure 10.4: Reference time dt scan.

10.6.4

Loop

This virtual Scan item (gure 10.5) can be used to repeat something in the acquisition sequence (for example image acquisition) for n times.

Figure 10.5: Acquisition item for item loop. You have to enter the number of loops and if this item is used for the naming of the image datasets. In this case the name of the item (Loop name) and the current counter (1-n) are added to the name of the dataset. For example: "Cam_Time=123010_Loop=1" "Cam_Time=123015_Loop=2" "Cam_Time=123020_Loop=3" "Cam_Time=123025_Loop=4" "Cam_Time=123030_Loop=5" 203

10 Recording

10.6.5

Table scan

The Table scan item is available since DaVis 7.2.2. This item handles a list of operating points, each of them describing a certain setting of multiple parameters. A typical example is the measurement on an automotive engine or similar complex devices. The measurement target is to vary several parameters in a certain range, which cannot be done simply linearly, once more than 3 parameters are involved. The basic idea of the Table Scan is to process a table of parameter settings row by row. Each table row represents a single operating point in the test, where a series of images have to be taken.

Select the Table scan item in the tree and press the Edit table scan button to edit the table:

The dialog is divided into two parts. The lower part shows the current table, each row represents one image acquisition (1 data set). The upper part shows 204

10.6 Recording Sequence items

the current device settings and the table administration buttons. At rst you have to specify the parameters in the table. Open the Table setup using the Table setup button:

In the Table parameters card of the setup you have to specify the parameters which will be added to the table. Use the arrow buttons in the middle of the dialog to add/remove the selected parameters to/from the Table parameters list. The settings in the Storage card denes how to name the set les for each scan position.

Dont use parameters for store name: The parameter names and values will not be added to the lenames. Use changing parameters for store name: The parameter which change their value within the table will be used for the data set lenames. Use all parameters for store name: All parameters of the table will be used. Use the following: Use the checkboxes to specify the parameters for the lenames. Press Ok to apply the settings and go back to the main Table scan dialog. 205

10 Recording

The administration button in the right part can be used to add/remove new scan positions to the table:

Append: Add a new scan position at the end of the table. Use the Device settings treeview rst to enter the values for the table parameters. Insert at: Same as Append but the new scan position is inserted at the specied position. Delete all: Delete the whole table. Delete line: Delete the specied row. Replace: Replace the parameter values of the specied row with the current values from the Device settings treeview. Load: Load the parameter values of the specifed row into the Device settings treeview. Append scan / Insert scan at: Use this button to append/insert a complete scan with an arbitrary number of rows:

206

10.6 Recording Sequence items

Use the Number of scan parameters item to specify how many parameters you want to scan at the same time (simultaneous). Specify for the rst parameter the Start, Increment and End value. These denes the number of steps for all other parameters. Press Ok to add the scan to the table or Cancel to abort. When you are satised with the table settings press the Back button in the toolbar to go back to the Recording dialog. The number of images you want to acquire for each scan position can be checked in the Image Acquisition card of the Recording sequence:

We recommend to store each scan in a separate folder which can be specied in the main Recording sequence card:

207

10 Recording

After that you start the scan by pressing the Start Recording button. The following image shows the result of this example scan:

10.6.6

Wait for trigger

Wait for a trigger input at the specied port (IN-...). After a trigger is detected the acquisition sequence continues with the next item.

10.6.7

Wait for key pressed

Wait for key event. After that the acquisition sequence continues with the next item.

10.6.8

User scan device

See chapter User Device on page 60.

10.6.9

CL command

The item of gure 10.6 is used to execute user dened CL macros. One example is the control of external devices like a COM-port connection with RS-232 commands.

Figure 10.6: Acquisition item for CL macros.

208

10.7 User dened parameter/scan

10.6.10

Image Processing

The item of gure 10.7 can be used to process the recorded dataset by a user dened operation list. This item must be added directly after an Image Acquistion item.

Figure 10.7: Acquisition item for postprocessing camera images.

If Execute Image Processing is enabled the item executes the dened operation list on the last recorded dataset. Press the folder button to change the operation list. You can can choose between the operation lists of the batch processing dialog.

10.7

User dened parameter/scan

See chapter User Device on page 60.

10.8

Fast Data Acquisition and Online Storage

For most cameras a special acquisition mode can be used to acquire the images with the maximum frame rate and store them images online on harddisc. The available speed is restricted by the hardware requirements. The number of images to acquire is restricted by the size of the harddisc only and not by the much smaller size of the PCs memory. 209

10 Recording

10.8.1

Hardware Requirements

Some special hardware may be needed to realize the maximum storage rate. Please contact LaVision for more information about the possibility of achieving the maximum rate with your camera and your hardware. Important requirements are:

A PC mainboard with two CPUs and a RAID controller for fast harddisc access may signicantly improve the storage performance. Maximum speed depends on camera type (CCD size, dynamic), on speed of Raid controller and of harddiscs and on the speed of the mainboard (type of PCI bus). The maximum speed will never be reached on single CPU systems. The maximum speed may break when executing other software during acquisition and storage. Even a screen saver may stop the maximum rate!

Raid System Setup For the fastest harddisc access the Raid system must be initialized as a Raid 0 in striping mode. In this mode all connected harddiscs are bulding a virtual large harddisc of the total size. No security information will be stored, losing one harddisc means losing the complete data. In striping mode the Raid controller puts blocks of e.g. each 256 kbyte alternating to the connected harddiscs. For example the writing of a 1 MB le is executed parallel to 4 harddiscs, each storing 256 kbyte. So the total writing speed is theoretically n times the speed of one harddisc for a Raid of n harddiscs. In contrast the linear mode lls the rst harddisc at rst, then the second and so on. In this case the speed is the speed of a single harddisc. After conguring the low level Raid, the new partition has to be formatted by the Windows operating system. Open the system management and their the drive management. Create a dynamic partition. Dont create a basic partition, which is much slower. Then format the device as NTFS with default parameters. 210

10.8 Fast Data Acquisition and Online Storage

Trouble Shooting After working for some time with fast storage during acquisition, the speed may slow down because of fragmentations on the harddisc. Reformat the harddisc to solve this problem. If the maximum speed is not reached, then decrease the frame rate until you get a stable value. Calculate the data rate and compare to the theoretical value of your hardware. Always close additional programs during fast storage.

10.8.2

Acquisition Sequence Setup

The Image Acquisition item in the Acquisition Sequence dialog includes a fast online storage checkbox. If this mode is selected, the image acquisition and data storage is executed in fast mode, while mode Use RAM and the image display are disabled. Internally the images are acquired into a ring of buers and stored from one buer while the next image is acquired into another buer. During the online storage some information are given in the status line about the lling of the ring buer and about the maximum size of the internal caches for image compression and le storage. If the storage is too slow to write all image data to harddisc online, the fast storage is stopped with a warning and the acquisition loop falls back into the normal (slow) mode. In this case the user has to slow down the acquisition rate or to upgrade the hardware by faster storage devices. Using the Fast Online Storage Mode Make sure that your project directory is located on the fastest harddisc of your system. Open the Recording dialog of your project and start the recording. The fast storage mode is used by default. The mode can be disabled in the setup dialog of gure 10.8. Note: Please avoid doing some other work on your PC during a fast image acquisition! Please close all other programs and disable the screen save! The DaVis system may not get enough CPU time to nish the image acquisition, data compression and storage before the next image is acquired. If the information in the status bar of DaVis tell about a low cache, about a lling of up to 30 percent during the complete acquisition and if the software does not fall back into normal acquisition mode, then the fast storage mode is available on your hardware. Otherwise the amount of image data must be 211

10 Recording

decreased, e.g. use a smaller image size and area of interest, or decrease the acquisition rate. By default DaVis is using a ring of 10 buers to temporary hold the camera images in the PCs main memory (RAM). The fast storage is working properly if it is possible to store an image during the acquisition of the next camera image. On a stable storage system the ring cache should hold at least two images in the queue between image acquisition and storage. The fast storage automatically uses the fastest buer compression mode. When using 12 bit cameras only, the data is compressed from 16 bits per pixel to 12 bits per pixel, which is a very fast mode. This is called a bitshift mode and stores either the lowest 12 bits (bit 0..11), or the middle bits (2..13) or the highest bits (4..15). Even faster is a 8 bit storage with dierent bitshifts (bits 0..7, bits 2..9, ...). When using a camera with higher bit resolution, the data is compressed dynamically with the IMX pack mode, which increases the time for packing the data, but could create a smaller le to be stored in a shorter time.

Critical Fast Storage Parameters All critical system parameters for the fast acquisition and online storage can be setup and customized for the used hardware in the Hardware Device Manager dialog. Please add virtual device Storage Parameters to your list of devices and select the new item to display the parameter card of gure 10.8. Warning: All parameters may be critical to your hardware conguration. Changes can make a fast online storage impossible! A packing thread is called with image data, compresses the data and prepares a le in memory. All threads are called alternating with dierent buers of the acquisition ring of camera images. When this parameter is changed, please restart DaVis to use the new value. The number of packing threads is 2 by default. Parallel threads are alternating called to store a le. Most harddisc controllers will increase the total storage rate when writing some les at the same time. When the number of writing threads is changed, please restart DaVis to use the new value. A number of buers if used for image acquisition with fast storage to hold each camera image temporary until the image data has been compressed and stored on harddisc. The packing and writing threads are working on a image buer while the image acquisition receives the next image(s) from the camera(s). By default a ring size of 10 buers is used. 212

10.8 Fast Data Acquisition and Online Storage

Figure 10.8: Dialog to setup critical parameters for the fast online storage mode.

The rst compression algorithm uses the possibly fastest compression to prepare the image data for storage. E.g. a 12 bit compression for 12 bit cameras or 8 bits per pixel for 8 bit cameras is faster than all other compression types, even if those are creating smaller les. All other modes can be tried to get the system more stable as with the rst mode. A recovery strategy is needed when the harddisc is too slow to store all images in the acquisition frequency. Then the le cache increases (the ring buer lls up) and the fast storage breaks. The rst return to slow mode switches the fast storage o and returns to the normal (slow) mode, storing each image immediately after the acquisition. The second mode throws away new images when the number of cached images is too large. A short message about the lost le index is given as Info text, and the complete list is stored in a le in the DaVis directory. When the cache returns to a normal level, then all new images will be stored again.

Storage mode Two-Level-Threads Mode 2-level-threads is the old storage mode parallel to the image acquisition. When an image has arrived in PC ram, the buer is given to the compression stage. This compresses the image data and prepares a le in memory. After compression, the memory block is given to the next stage, which stores the block as le on harddisc. 213

10 Recording

In theory the behaviour would be this: 1. Camera acquires rst image 2. Camera acquires second image, compression on rst image 3. Camera acquires third image, compression on second image, storage of rst image 4. Camera acquires fourth image, compression on third image, storage of second image A ring buer is needed to reach this. The images are acquired to buers 1, 2, 3, ..., 10, 1, 2, ..., so the compression can work on buers which are not touched by the acquisition at the same time. The number of threads should be at least two and can be four when the PC includes two or more CPU cores. This optimizes the usage of all CPUs. Two threads are needed to avoid problems with other actions of the Windows operating system, which are not controlled by DaVis. Storage mode Geometric Blocks / Xpress Streaming Mode Geometry Blocks or Xpress Steaming is a new storage mode from summer 2007. In this mode we have the acquisition parallel to a parallel compression and storage level. In dierence to 2-level-threads this mode stores the les immediately after compression and does not give the memory blocks to another stage. The storage is very fast because of using the geometry of the harddisc and avoiding le access via high level functions of the operation system.

10.9

AOI Monitor

The AOI Monitor is useful to watch over the intensity evolution in one or more areas of interest (AOIs) when grabbing images. The result will be displayed in a prole view, see example in gure 10.10. The dialog is splitted into two cards, one for setup and one for display of the monitored proles. If the dialog is very small, e.g. when using the Recording dialog with 2x2 windows, then the setup card is splitted into two cards (rectangle setup and display parameters). In the rst card Setup the size and position of up to ve rectangles and the display parameters can be dened. The table gives information for each AOI about being monitored (each AOI can be switched o) and about the pixel 214

10.9 AOI Monitor

Figure 10.9: Setup of the AOI Monitor dialog as part of the Recording dialog.

position of the rectangle. The last column displayed the intensity of each AOI when grabbing images. In the seconds table up to ve device data can be selected for monitoring. To select an image area or a device data, please press into a row of the table with the right mouse button and execute select area or select device data. For an area you will be asked to dene the rectangle with two mouse clicks in the active camera image. For device data a list of available devices is given in a selection dialog. The context menu gives also access to disable/enable the display of the selected area or device. The order of the lines can be changed (move up/down), and the areas can be marked on screen, or the device value can be updated in the table. The Prole length gives the number of scan points for each AOI and the maximum length of the displayed proles. The proles are lled from left to right. When the display reaches the rightmost position, either the prole restarts from the left and exchanges each old value by a new one, or the prole is cleared in mode clear when lled. The displayed range of pixel intensities can be auto adjusted for the y-axis. The x-axis never changes, but it can be scaled by time of the images or by the image number. 215

10 Recording

The intensity of a AOI is either calculated as average or as sum of all pixel in the rectangular area. This intensity value can be displayed in the prole as absolut value or in dierence to the preceeding value. The display mode is by default a prole, but this may be completed by the intensity value of each AOI. Another mode is the intensity value and a bar, which is lled up to a level depending on the recent image intensity.

Figure 10.10: Example for proles in the AOI Monitor dialog as part of the Recording dialog.

10.10

Hotkey

The Hotkey mode is used to change device parameters (e.g. exposure time) during grabbing of images (Grab button). This is a very useful function during the ne tuning of the cameras and e.g. image itensiers because it is not necessary to stop and restart grabbing if some parameters should be changed To activate the Hotkey mode you have to show the Camera Image (with the window manager) and press the Grab button to take continuously images. After that you have to press one of the cursor keys (up, down, left or right) to show the Hotkey dialog in the lower part of the screen (see gure 10.11). The treeview in the left part shows all devices which provides hotkey parameters and the right part shows the corresponding parameter card of the active treeview device. Using the cursor keys you can navigate through the active 216

10.10 Hotkey

Figure 10.11: Hotkey dialog. part (treeview or parameter dialog) which is marked with a blue border. The Enter key is used to toggle the active part (treeview and parameter dialog).

Figure 10.12: Hotkey dialog. Now you can use the cursor keys to navigate through the items of the dialog where the active item is marked with a blue background. The rst item of each line shows the current value of the parameter and the second item shows the increment for this parameter. The + and - keys are used to change the values of the active item. If you press the + or - key on a parameter value is is changed by the increment value. If you press the + or - key on a increment value the value is changed by dened steps (1,2,4,10...). Press the SPACE key to stop grabbing.

217

10 Recording

218

11 Batch Processing
The Batch Processing dialog can be reached using the Batch button in the Project Manager. The dialog can be used for automatic processing of an arbitrary number of data les. Via a pipeline operation list up to nine functions may be applied iteratively.

The dialog is subdivided in three sections, on the top left you nd the Data source, on the top right the Operation list and on the bottom left and right a view on the data source and the intermediate or nal result respectively.

219

11 Batch Processing

On the top right the name of the Data source you are currently working on is shown. Using the info button you may access the View set dialog where you can have a look at comment or attached parameter groups that have been stored with the set during image acquisition. The Maximum range and the Images indicate the data range of the loaded set. Using the Selected range and the Increment textboxes you may extract a selection of the complete data set for further processing. The Error level may help to analyze problems during processing of the pipeline operation list. Three dierent error levels may be selected:

low: Errors and warnings during processing will be ignored.

medium: Warning will be ignored, but the processing is halted on errors.

high: Errors will be displayed and the processing is halted.

The info button can be used to open the Batch Processing message logle of the last calculation where a list of executed functions can be seen. The Show source switch may be used to show or hide the current data source in the lower part of the dialog (can be toggled during processing). The Show result switch may be used to show or hide the result view in the lower part of the dialog (can be toggled during processing). The Start Processing button starts the processing of the operation pipeline list for all images in the selected range with the selected increment while the Test Processing button will execute the operations only to the displayed source image/vector. If Show source is unchecked the Test Processing button will execute the operations to the rst le of the Selected range. The progress bar shows the status of the complete calculation. 220

11.1 Operation list

11.1

Operation list

In the Operation list you can select the operations and the parameter of the included functions. In the tree view you may select suitable operations for each of the nine function wild cards. The operation list is executed for each image of the set from the top to the bottom. The operation may be selected by activating a function via left mouse click. This will open the Parameter le card on the right where the available function can be accessed in a selectionbox. Alternatively you can use the right mouse button on the function wild card and selecting the set operation option in the pop-up window. When a selected operation allows to specify parameter you can use the + in the tree view to access the parameter for this operation. Using the right mouse button on the function wild card you also have the possibility to enable or disable a function (a disabled function is skipped in the operation list during processing) or to move up and move down operations in the list. The function states are:

: The Batch Processing has calculated a result for this operation. Selecting this item will display the result in the lower area of the dialog (if Show result is enabled).

: This operation is disabled. Press the right mouse button on the item and use the popup menu to change the state of operation (enable/disable). The disable operation option is only available for operations with the same source and result type (image image or vector vector).

On the Operation le card you can select a Group and an Operation. The Storage mode determines if and how the results are stored: 221

11 Batch Processing

o: The results are not stored in the current project but temporary on your harddisk. When the storage is o the software will show a Warning above the progress bar. default: The result is stored in the current project with a default name in the subfolder of the source dataset. specify: The result is stored in the current project with the specied name in the subfolder of the source dataset. overwrite source: Overwrite source data SET. This option is only for a few functions available. The Show intermediate results ag determines the display of intermediate results during processing when the Show results ag is set.

11.1.1

Load/Save

You may use the Load, Save and Delete button to load an operation list from disk, to save the current operation list to disk or to delete the current operation list. After pressing the Load (Save) button the following dialog appears:

The dialog provides 10 writable User lists and depending on the project type some additional Preset lists (read only). The Import from le.. (Export to le.. ) button can be used to load (store) the active operation list to (from) harddisk. NOTE: A stored operation list consists of a setle (*.set) and the corresponding folder with the same name!

11.2

Streaming mode

The Streaming mode can be used to change the processing order of the current operation list (only available for more than one operation): 222

11.3 Hyperloop

Standard mode (Streaming=o ): - Calculate the 1. operation (whole SET). - Calculate the 2. operation (whole SET). - ... Streaming mode: - Calculate all operations (1. source buer). - Calculate all operations (2. source buer). - Calculate all operations (3. source buer). - ... The Streaming mode may decrease the overall processing time (because intermediate results are not stored onto hard disk) and allow a better check of the results during processing.

11.3

Hyperloop

The Batch Processing dialog is able to process an arbitrary number of datasets with one mouse click. This can be done using the Hyperloop dialog (see page 99). In this case the dialog provides one additional option: Use full data range for all datasets: This is a very useful option if the number of les diers between the selected datasets.

11.4

Available Groups for All Data Sources

In this section the functions are explained, which can be executed for all types of data sources: images, proles and vectors. 223

11 Batch Processing

11.4.1

Operation: copy and reorganize

copy data: Copy all sources using the selected range and increment of the Batch Processing dialog.

reverse order: Copy all sources and reverse the storing order.

merge dataset: Merge all sources with the corresponding le of the specied datasets to a multiframe buer:

Press the folder button to select a dataset or enter the name of the dataset in the edit eld. The cross button can be used to clear the current entry. It is also possible to use the following wildcards to nd a corresponding dataset: * : n characters ? : 1 character %parameter% : replace with parameter of the source dataset The les of all found datasets will be merged.

append dataset: Copy the source dataset and append the buers of the specied dataset. See operation merge dataset.

extract frame: Extract the specied frame of every source buer.

reorganize frames: Reorganize the frames of every source buer. Choose for every source frame between the destination frame number and delete.

create multi-frame buer from time series: Choose between: 224

11.4 Available Groups for All Data Sources

create (n-1) images: 1+2, 2+3, 3+4...:

create (n/2) images: 1+2, 3+4, 5+6...:

create 1 image with n frames: 1+2+3+4...:

create (n-k) images: 1+(1+k), 2+(2+k), 3+(3+k)...:

225

11 Batch Processing

11.4.2

Operation: user function

user function 1-3: Execute a user dened macro function. The entered name must be the prex of three dierent macro functions. An example of the syntax can be found in the Command Language manual. Press button Function Parameter to open a dialog box for editing parameters of this user dened function. execute CL-command 1-3: Execute a user dened CL-command for each source buer. Use the following placeholder: theBuer: Input/output buer. theIndex: Source index 1-n. For example: B[theBuer] = theIndex * 100;

11.5
11.5.1

Available Groups for Data Source: Image

Operation: basic image arithmetic

The basic arithmetics give access to simple mathematical operations with constant values or other data sets. Other functions are used to apply masks or to change the buer type or dimension. add: Add to an image: constant: in counts (not scaled), le: at given path, dataset: add image n from the source to image n from the specied dataset. buer: enter a buer number (only available in DaVis Classic mode). subtract: Subtract from image: constant: in counts (not scaled), le: at given path, dataset: subtract image n from the source to image n from the specied dataset. buer: enter a buer number (only available in DaVis Classic mode). 226

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

multiply: Multiply source image with: constant: in counts (not scaled), le: at given path, dataset: multiply image n from the source with image n from the specied dataset. buer: enter a buer number (only available in DaVis Classic mode). divide: Divide source image by: constant: in counts (not scaled). le: at given path. dataset: divide image n from the source by image n from the specied dataset. buer: enter a buer number (only available in DaVis Classic mode). absolute: Get absolute values of every source pixels. logarithm: Logarithm of the source images. exponentiate: Exponentiate of the source images. squareroot: Squareroot of the source images. modulo: Calculates the source image modulo a constant value. binarize: Set all pixels with an intensity above the border to 1 count and the remaining pixels to 0 count. word oat: Changes the buer type to oat. oat word: Changes the buer type to word. invert buer (buer = constant - buer): Invert the source image using a constant value and convert the result to a word/oat: Specify: Enter the constant value. Use maximum of each image: for the constant value. Use maximum of rst image: of the source for the constant value. set above/below to constant: Set all pixels above and/or below a specied value to a constant value. 227

11 Batch Processing

apply mask: Set source pixels to 0 counts when the corresponding pixel in the mask image has 0 counts. See page 267 for details about the Mask Editor. contour plot: segmentation: resize: Change the dimension of the source buer. Each dimension can be changed separatly to a new size or left untouched. inside rectangle = const: Sets all pixel inside the rectangular region to the constant value. Press button Rect to dene a region with the mouse in the source image, or press button Show to show the selected rectangle. The coordinates can be edited directly in the dialog. By default the region is applied to the source buer once. When having a multi frame buer, you can switch the display to the stacked frame display, and then select the rectangle in the stacked buer. But when the same rectangle should be applied to each frame, then select the rectangle in one frame and change to mode use rectangle in each frame. outside rectangle = const: Set all pixel outside the rectangular region to a constant value. Same interface as in the last function. extract rectangle: Copy a rectangular region out of the source image. On multi frame buers the same rectangle is copied from each frame, and the result is a multi frame buer again. The coordinates of the rectangle can either be entered directly into the edit items, or the upper left and lower right corner can be marked with two mouse clicks in the source image when pressing button Set Rect. extract volume: Copy a free volume from the source buer into the destination. The pixel or vector ranges and be given seperatly for each axis (X, Y, Z, F). Select a checkbox to enter a restricted range. Otherwise the complete range is copied.

11.5.2

Operation: image mapping

mirror: Mirror/ip all source images. Choose between mirror left/right, mirror top/bottom, ip x/y or ip -x/y. rotate: Rotate all source images: 228

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

Rotate 90 left/right, 180: Rotate at the center of the image. Specify: Rotate images by a specied angle. The center of the rotation can be changed with Center x and Center y (pixel). resize: Change the size of the source images: Compress (1-16): Compress all images by an integer factor between 1-16. Expand (1-16): Expand all images by an integer factor between 1-16. Resize (arbitrary): Resize all images by an arbitrary factor. deform with vector eld: Deform an image with a specied vector eld. image correction (raw to world): Apply the correction coecients of a camera to all source images. image distortion (world to raw): Apply the inverse correction coecients of a camera to all source images. image reconstruction Apply a geometric image correction or distortion and/or a pixel shift correction using specied vector eld to an image. The result will be a oat buer.

In the group box Geometric image correction or distortion checking the Apply transformation checkbox switches on the image correction / distortion. An additional parameter is the z position for which this is done. The default is at z = 0 mm which is the position of rst view calibration plate and usually also the light sheet position in PIV. If you need to readjust the value to a dierent z position (second option in the radio button) to match images from two mapped cameras you may have to think about doing a stereo self calibration to readjust the z = 0 mm plane of the calibration. In case you have a surface height buer (e.g. StrainMaster 3D or SurfaceFlow package) surface height le (IM7) holding the z height information 229

11 Batch Processing

for every pixel in world coordinates can be specied. It will be used to correct all images in the source set. Or you specify a set le (SET) with the height information for every buer in the source set. Then the N th le in the surface height set is used as the reference height to correct the N th image of the source set. Press the open le button to select a dierent souce for the reference surface height(s). In the group box Shift Correction checking the Apply shift Correction checkbox switches on to undo an additional pixel shift in the source images using the given reference vector eld. If you select a single vector eld (VC7) this information will be used for all images in source set. Or you specify a set le (SET) with vector elds holding the pixel shift information for every buer in the source set. Then the N th le in the vector set is used as the reference shift to correct the N th image of the source set. Also select if to take out the specied shift from the second frame only (0, +V) or if to take out half the shift symmetrically from both frames (-V/2, +V/2). While the asymmetric shift (0, +V) is usually done in StrainMaster systems, the symmetrical shift (-V/2, +V/2) is the default case for PIV. Press the open le button to select a dierent souce for the reference vector eld(s). In the group box Global settings the interpolation algorithm and the frame range to which the image reconstruction is applied is selected. While the bilinear interpolation using only the nearest neighbours to the left, right, top and bottom is very fast it has a smoothing eect on the pattern. On the other hand Whittaker reonstruction and Lanczos interpolation use all pixels in a 10x10 neighbourhood. While they are signicantly slower the corrected images will maintain the sharpness of the original. The frame range is specied to treat either all frames of a buer (all (double) frames) or only one or two user specied frames. In the rst case all frames are scanned for matching pairs of double frames belonging to the same camera and the transformation is applied to those. Matching double frames is important to apply the shift correction properly. In the other case the two specied frames are used and treated as a double frame even if they belong to dierent cameras. All frame numbers start from 0. Specifying a frame number of -1 means to ignore this frame. So a frame combination of 0 and 1 will correct the rst (0) and the second (1) frame in the buer applying a shift correction of (0, V ) or (V /2, +V /2) as 230

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

indicated. A frame combination of 0 and 1 will correct the rst frame only applying a shift correction of 0 or V /2 as indicated. A frame combination of 1 and 0 will correct the rst frame only but this time applying a shift correction of V or +V /2 as indicated.

11.5.3

Operation: attributes

set scales by dened values: Change the image scales of all directions: X, Y, Z, I(intensity), F(frames):

Choose between: Use scale for all frames: Dene the scales for X,Y,Z,.. in the lower part of the dialog. These scales will be set for all source frames. Set each frame scale separately: Use the up/down button of the frame# item to toggle between all source frames. With this it is possible to set each frame scale separately. If the Default checkbox is activated the corresponding scale will not be changed. use rst image as source: Extract the scale parameters from the rst source image. use image: Extract the scale parameters from a le and apply this to the source images. use camera scaling: Select a camera as scaling source. transfer curr. image correction+camera scales: Apply the current image correction and camera scales to all source images. reset scales: Reset all scales to the default values with factor 1, oset 0, unit pixel or intensity, empty description. 231

11 Batch Processing

adjust scales according to scan position: The image scales are adjusted by an oset in the x- and y-direction that originates from a translation stage scan in the corresponding directions. Make sure that the images are scaled in mm to use this operation. [add:] Add a new buer attribute. Attribute list: List of all attributes of the source. Add attribute: Enter the name of the new attribute and its value. remove: Remove an attribute from the source. Attribute list: List of all attributes of the source. change: Change the value of an existing buer attribute. Attribute list: List of all attributes of the source. add overlay: Changes the overlay from all source buers to a dened layout. This layout can be taken from a le (default type OVL) or from a overlay denition. This denition can be edited directly in the source image when pressing button Edit Overlay. See page 265 for details about the Overlay Editor. The OVL le can be stored from the overlay dialog. add default attributes: This operation can be used to add or modify the following default attributes to the selected data set: CameraName#n: Camera number of frame n. AcqTime#n: Arrival time of frame#n within one acquisition (1 image). AcqTimeSeries#n: Arrival time of image#n within one recording (1 data set).

These attributes are very important for many operations in DaVis and must be added after importing les without these attributes (bmp, tif..). The CameraName attribute is used to identify the corresponding camera number (needed for calibration, image correction etc.). The AcqTime 232

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

attributes are used to compute the time between two frames (vector computation, general time series operations). add device data: Add device data from selected prole SET:

Use this operation to add the data of a prole data set (with n proles) as device data to the selected source set. First select a prole data set using the folder button in the dialog. After that select the frame# if each prole has more than 1 frame, the default value is 0. The Start le index and File increment can be used to specify another range, for example: start with prole 100 with an increment of 10 (100,110,120..). The name of the added device data can also be specied.

11.5.4

Operation: statistics

sum, average, rms, min, max: Calculate the following results: sum: add all source images. average: of all source images. rms: of the source images, see chapter on Root Mean Square on page 111 for the denition. min, max: for every pixel nd the minimum or maximum intensity of all source images and store the min- or max-value in the resulting buer. max-min: calculates the dierence of both above described resulting images. PDF: This function uses a threshold to calculate the Probability Density Function. All pixels above the threshold are set to 1, all pixels below are set to 0. The resulting image is the sum of the 0/1-images. Select normalize: to present the resulting image in range 0...1. normalize 100%: for range 0...100. 233

11 Batch Processing

2-Level-PDF: works like PDF but calculates two resulting buers for different levels. Histogram: Create a histogram of the intensities in the image and store result as prole. Each slot of the prole gives the number of pixel with the corresponding intensity. Optional a rectangle can be dened or selected with mouse clicks. The intensity range must be given with a minimum and maximum value. Leave this 0 to 0 for the complete range. The range is devided into the given number of slots.

11.5.5

Operation: copy and reorganize

This functions are additional available for image sources in the reorganize group. change number of frames: Change for every source image the number of frames. extract UltraSpeedStar frames: Extract the frames from a UltraSpeedStar camera. scalar components: Scalar components are additional information for each pixel of a buer. This components can be extracted from a buer, when the buer includes such components. In this case in card Parameter a list of available components is given. Press button Refresh to read the component list from the loaded source buer in the Batch Processing dialog. The result of this operation will be a simple image buer, named by the selected component and including this components values and their scale. When appending a scalar component to source buers, a name of this component has to be dened. Either append a single component (ll with 0) or take another image data SET and copy the pixel values of each image buer to the corresponding pixels component of the source buers. combine R/G/B-frames to RGB image : Take three frames of the source buer as color components and create a RGB color buer. The rst frame gives the red component, the second green and the third blue. This function is often used as back operation to rgb lter create R/G/B frames. 234

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

11.5.6

Operation: time series

dierence to rst image: Subtract the rst image from every source. sliding avg,min,max over time: Calculate the sliding minimum, average or maximum over n (Num. of images) source images. For example n = 3:

average of all images: Average of all selected source images. normalization to rst image: Normalize the intensity level all source images to the rst image. subtract sliding minimum over time: Calculate the minimum from n (Num. of images) consecutive images and subtract this from the current source image. For example: n=5, current source image=15: Calculate minimum (source image 13-17) and subtract this from current source image (15).

shift and intensity correction: Shift and intensity correction will adjust all images to the image intensity and position of the rst image of the set. Thus non-uniform images can be adapted to match the rst one in brightness (e.g. due to changing background) and/or position. A shift correction might be necessary if your object or the cameras moved during the image recording (e.g. due to vibrations) or if your images were derived from scanned photographs that are not aligned very well from one image to the other. To match the position you select one or more objects that are resting in your frame of reference (for example a 235

11 Batch Processing

part of the objects housing) and all images will be shifted (and rotated) to match that position. Images with non-uniform lighting or background noise can be adapted to reach the same mean intensity of the rst image.

Figure 11.1: General Parameter In the top of the rst parameter card (General Parameter) the Data range is dened. Here you select a rectangular region of your interest that will be cut out rst before proceeding on the whole image. All the data outside will be left out in the result. If you have dened an image correction for your camera be aware that cutting out data in that way will make your image correction invalid, as now the pixel (0/0) correspond to a wrong position of your calibration plate. So either cut out the cross plate pictures as well using the same region and redo the calibration process or correct the images rst and performing the shift and intensity correction afterwards. Then of course the evaluation should not use image correction again as the images are already corrected!. The available operations are carried out in succession and add their affects accumulatively. Intensity normalization relative to rst image will adapt all images to the mean brightness of the rst image. This might be adequate for image series with varying background intensities or non constant illumination of the object. Subtract sliding minimum is a high pass lter that lters out the local mean background intensity (over a scale of the specied number of pixels) leaving only the local uctuations. To avoid zero clipping when subtracting the local mean value you can specify a number of counts in Add intensity oset that will be added to the image before subtracting the local mean value of the original image. 236

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

Enabling the group box Shift correction enables the translation correction (and rotation correction if Rotation correction is specied) of all images relative to the rst image. The parameters for shift and rotation correction are dened on the second parameter card (Shift and Rotation Correction). Last but not least you might specify the name of your own CL-Macro (e.g. "TestMacro") that will be executed for each image to be processed. It must have the parameters int buffer which is the buer number that will be used to provide the input buer and return the output buer for your routine and int index which will pass the number of the image in the set in case you may want to keep track of the progress in your macro. This option might be used by more advanced users to add all kind of image postprocessing operations to the image, using (but not necessarily) the other functionality of the dialog as well.

Figure 11.2: Shift and Rotation Correction parameter As center of shift correction you can either leave the default center of data range or specify any other point that lies on a static structure (e.g. housing of the object) that is xed with your frame of reference and is not aected by the studied structures. To specify another point of reference for shift detection press the button points to the right of the shift correction check box. This might be necessary if another point is more suitable than the default position. In Correlation window size you specify the correlation window. This window is shown as a red box in your image. Please select its size so that the static structure used for the image matching lies well inside, but (almost) no contrast is included as this random information disturbs the correlation. If you have the choice bigger windows usually lead to more stable results. In any case the window size should be two times greater than the maximum shift among images, or the algorithm will fail. If 237

11 Batch Processing

this cannot be achieved for the current static structure look for a more suitable one. If you already know that a linear movement is taking place in your image series (linear trajectory of your static structure through the images) you might specify an Average shift in x and y. This will be applied to every image before starting the correlation. So the correlation window size might be kept small and still you are able to detect large shifts. The Calculate shift option denes how the algorithm works: The relative to rst mode uses the rst image to calculate the shift. This mode is very exact but can only be used for small absolute shifts within one Set. The relative to n-1 mode calculates the shift relative to the last image and adds the absolute shift from the last. This can be used for larger shifts but is not so exact because an small error will be added from image to image. Enable the Subpixel shift option to correct shifts smaller than one pixel. The shift correction will only perform a translational correction and does not detect rotations!

To eliminate all remaining rotation around the position specied for the shift correction (these do match already after the shift correction) you might add a rotational correction. In this second step several areas marked by the detection points are matched and the best rotation angle is computed. The default position of this detection points are around the specied static structure. If there are more than one static structure visible in the image it is recommended to specify your own detection points. Pressing the button points you can select up to 20 reference points for the rotational correction. The farther away from the static structure used in shift correction the greater the level for the rotational correction and the better the estimate for the optimal angle. Once again the detection window should be adapted to the objects used for detection points, and as for the same reasons as described above the bigger they are the better.

11.5.7

Operation: linear lter

Filter the source by one of the linear lters described in chapter Filter Operations in the Imaging Tools manual. The result can be stored either in a word buer or in a oat buer. 238

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

11.5.8

Operation: user dened linear lter

Filter the source by one of the user dened linear lters, see chapter about User Filter in the Imaging Tools manual for a description about the way to dene those lters.

11.5.9

Operation: non-linear lter

Filter the source by one of the non-linear lters described in chapter Nonlinear Filter in the Imaging Tools manual. The result can be stored either in a word buer or in a oat buer.

11.5.10

Operation: proles and time plots

extract device data: Extract device data from the source dataset: Data source: Select the device source you want to extract. Channel: Select the analog input channel. Prole mode 1 datapoint per image: Create one prole for the whole dataset with one datapoint for every source image. Prole mode 1 prole per image: Create for every source image one devive data prole. X-Scale: Select the X-scale of the prole. convert DaVis 6 analog to device data: The internal format to store analog/device data changed between DaVis 6 and DaVis 7. With the help of the operation the old analog data can be converted into the new device data format. No parameters are needed. extract local image data: Specify up to 10 rectangular regions in the source image which local data are stored in a prole: Data list item: Select 1 of the 10 items you want to specify. Data range: Select the data range of the selected item or o to disable this item. Data mode: Select the type of data which is calculated within the data range. Description: Enter a description text which is displayed on the result prole. X-Scale: Select the X-scale of the prole. 239

11 Batch Processing

extract image attribute: Extract the value of the specied image attribute from the source dataset. take prole: Extract a prole from the image or vector eld. Press the button right to the prole mode to select a row, column or arbitrary line in the source image. See page 186 for a detailed description of the modes.

11.5.11

Operation: intensity correction

energy correction: Correct the intensity level of an image with the help of the energy value of a device. At rst select the energy value either from a constant user value or from a device data attribute. Press button Update List of Device Data to create the list of available device data, which are stored in the active source image. As second step you have to dene a reference value. If the energy value is equal to the reference value, then no intensities would be changed. The reference value can either be taken from the device data, because most device data get their default reference value. Or the reference value can be dened by the user. If selected, the energy correction can be restricted to those images with the energy value in a certain range. If the value is outside of the range, the image can either be left uncorrected, or set to 0 intensity, or simply not stored in the destination SET. extract intensity of rectangle : The intensity of a rectangular area in the source image is calculated and stored in the result as new device data. Available modes are the average, minimum, maximum, sum or rms. This function can be used to correct the intensity level of an image corresponding to the level in a rectangular area. Therefore use the extract intensity function as rst operation in the operation list, followed by an energy correction.

11.5.12

Operation: rgb lter

This operation group is available for RGB image sources only. rgb lter: Each color component can be multiplied by a certain factor. The result is either a oat buer or, if create RGB buer is selected, again a color buer. For the rst mode a normalization to 1 is possible, then the resulting intensities are in range 0...1. This function can be used to extract one color component from the RGB buer, just set one factor to 1 and the other to 0. 240

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

hue lter: Filter colors with the color circle in a given range: 0 = 360 = red, 120 = green, 240 = blue. create R/G/B frames: The image is splitted into the three color components. Each component is stored in a single frame of the resulting oat image buer: The rst component includes the red component, the second green and the third blue. Now for example the statistics function may be executed as next operation. At the end the frames can be recombined into a RGB image by Copy&Reorganize Combine to RGB.

11.5.13

Operation: image stitching

image stitching (frame): Perform image stitching for multiframe images from multiple cameras.

On the main parameter card the stitching mode can be selected between: Fixed overlap: Uses the xed overlap (16, 32, 64 or 128 px) for all frames that may be specied in the Overlap selection box below. A search algorithm tries to nd the correct stitching position within the specied overlap. Automatic search: A search algorithm uses the specied window size (64x64, 128x128, 256x256 px) to scan the overlap region for the correct position. The search window may be specied in the Window selection box below. Manual: Allows to select the overlap point manually for each frame. After start you are asked to specify the identical points once for each frame. After that a correlation algorithm is used to nd the correct overlap at the specied positions. 241

11 Batch Processing

Use frame position and scales: Use frame position and scales: Uses the position and scale of each frame only to arrange the frames in the stitched image. Additional options are: Intensity correction between frames: Applies an intensity correction during stitching of the frames to avoid an intensity gradients. Subpixel mode: Will make sure that the shift of the frames with respect to each other will be detected by correlation with subpixel accuracy. Use image correction: Will apply the image correction that is valid for the corresponding camera before starting image stitching. Correct rotation: A search algorithm uses correlation to correct a possible rotation of the frames during image stitching. Calculate stitching for each image: Will calculate the position of the frames in the patched up image again for each image in the dataset. Apply stitching of rst image to whole dataset: Will calculate the position of the frames in the image for the rst image in the dataset and will apply this to all following images. Frame assignment: Denes the global arrangement of the frames in the patched up image.

242

11.5 Available Groups for Data Source: Image

Correlation settings: Correlation function: Allows to select from Standard and Normalized correlation function (nd details in the FlowMaster manual) Minimum valid vectors: Allows to specify the minimum of the valid vectors detected by the correlation function. The higher the value the more accurate is the detected overlap. Minimum same vectors: Allows to specify the minimum of same vectors, i.e. vectors that indicate the identical shift. The higher the value the more accurate is the detected overlap.

image stitching (scale): Create a single image from a set of images with the same image size and a single frame, but with dierent osets for each image scale. Use this operation after operation adjust scales according to scan position from the attributes group. The operation rst calculates the size of the result image from all input images in the selected range. Then the images are copied to the result buer. The later images override the earlier ones in the overlapping parts. In the moment no sub pixel interpolation is applied. To use the adjust scales according to scan position operation, make sure that the settings for the translation stage include the correct denitions for the coordinate axis x and y.

The translation stage coordinates in the x-direction must increase from left to right in the image. The y coordinates must increase from bottom to the top in the image. If this is not the case, exchange the Reset position and the Max. position to achieve a correct coordinate system for the stage. 243

11 Batch Processing

So e.g. if the x-axis of the stage has the wrong direction, change the Reset position to 500 mm and the Max. position to 0 mm.

WARNING: the Max. position value is dierent from stage to stage and must t to the mechanical range.

Before the adjust scales according to scan position operation can be applied, the images from the recorded sets at all scan positions have to be reorganized into a single set.

Enter the hyperloop dialog and select the Reorganize Data operation.

Enter the Parameter ... settings. 244

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

Set ignore variable parameters so that x and y-axis are ignored. Then close the parameter settings and execute the reorganization.

11.6

Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

In this section the additional groups for vector sources are explained.

11.6.1

Operation: basic vector arithmetic

vector postprocessing: Applies vector postprocessing, for a description of the parameter see Vector calculation chapter. add: A vector is added. This vector is constant: with specied components Vx, Vy, Vz in pixel, a le: at given path, a dataset: at given path. subtract: A vector is subtracted. This vector is constant: with specied components Vx, Vy, Vz in pixel. 245

11 Batch Processing

a le: at given path. a dataset: at given path. multiply: Each vector is multiplied with the specied factor. ROT-3D-vector: Calculates the 3D-rotational vector with the components Vx = Ezy Eyz Vy = Exz Ezx Vz = Eyx Exy (11.1) (11.2) (11.3)

based on the information of a two-frame vector buer (a buer containing two vector elds). convert to standard 2D: Converts a vector eld to the standard 2D vector eld with corresponding buer attributes. Information like the peak ratio or the dierent choices of a vector will be deleted. PTV: convert to grid: Converts an arbitrary PTV vector eld to a vector eld with vectors on a regular grid which is required e.g. for vector postprocessing. calc. acceleration: Calculates the acceleration vector eld based on the information of a two-frame vector buer with corresponding buer attributes.

11.6.2

Operation: vector mapping

exchange uv: Exchanges the u- and v- component of each vector. merge vectors: Merge frames of multi frame vector buer into one frame. This works on mm frame coordinates to match vectors, so to stitch vector elds a proper calibration is required please refer to the Davis Tool dialog manual in the chapter Calibration. This operation is used to stitch vector elds from a side-to-side camera setup or to join vector elds with diering masked out regions. the latter occurs for example if you apply dierent vector calculation parameters to nd large shifts and small shifts in an image (e.g. regions of low speed / high speed displacements). You would have to join the two vector result sets rst using the merge data set operation in the copy and reorganize group. The vector grid has to be the same in all merged data sets. 246

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

Please refer to the following screen shots:

11.6.3

Operation: extract scalar eld: vector component

When a scalar value is extracted from a vector eld typically a single value is extracted for each vector. This vector has been calculated on the size of one interrogation window. To have the possibility to display the extracted scalar eld in the background of a vector eld you may select the Enlarge raw data option on all of the Parameter le cards. Then the scalar eld is enlarged with the grid size of the input vector elds to t the original image size. The enlarged scalar image may be smoothed over a fraction or a multiple of the vector grid selecting Smooth: o, 0.5, 1, 2 or interpolate. Enlarged scalar elds can be scmoothed via sliding average with a lter length of 0.5*grid size, 1*grid size or 2*grid size or again bilinear interpolation. Both methods have their (dis)advantages: bilinear: constant gradients across background values stay smooth, nonlinear gradients lead to (slight) bends (piecewise linear tiles) nonlinear lter: constant gradients across background values produce (slight) stair steps, nonlinear gradients when enlarged lead to nicer and smoother nonlinear slopes |V | vector length: Calculates vector elds.
2 Vx + Vy2 or 2 Vx + Vy2 + Vz2 for 2C- or 3C-

Vx component (u): Extracts the u-component of the velocity vector = Vx . Vy component (v): Extracts the v-component of the velocity vector = Vy . Vz component (w): Extracts the w-component of the velocity vector = Vz . 247

11 Batch Processing

peak ratio 1./2. or value 1.: Determines the peak ratio for each vector, i.e. the ratio of the correlation value of the highest and the second highest correlation peak or (depends on the settings when the calcualtion was done) the correlation value of the highes peak. vector choice (0=o,1-5): Extracts the vector choice, i.e. 0 for a disabled vector and 1-4 for the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th vector choice and 5 for a postprocessed vector. additional component: if available the scalar value of a scalar component (stored insode the buer) at the corresponding position is used. For example : the average / RMS calculation (batch op. group : statistics) stores the number of vectors that contribute to the averaged / RMS vector at each position in a scalar component. vector angle: Extracts the angle in respect to the positive x-axis (counter clockwise) of each vector. |V| pixel shift: Same as |V | vector length, but vectors are scaled to show the pixel shift in pixel. |V| displacement: Same as |V | vector length, but vectors are scaled to show the pixel shift in mm. |V| speed: Same as |V | vector length, but vectors are scaled to show the velocity (if times are available). Vr / Vangle (polar coordinates): This BatchOP has two Extraction modes that allow the extraction of scalar elds of Vr (radial component) and Vangle (polar angle component) in respect to a user specied origin. The origin can either be set with mouse (press the button labeled Dene origin by mouse) or dened directly entering the pixel position in the corresponding text elds. Pressing Show current position in Source Window will draw the currently selected position in the source window buer (if visible) as overlay graphics. Enlarging the resulting scalar eld by a factor of "grid" is optional. Please refer to the following 4 images which shows the result: Extraction mode Vr : 248

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

Extraction mode Vangle :

11.6.4

Operation: extract scalar eld: divergence

All magnitudes in this group are based on the strain Tensor Eij = Vi /j with i {x, y, z} and j {x, y, z} Please refer to section 11.6.6 for a detailed description of how these values are calculated in DaVis 249

11 Batch Processing

2D-Div-xy -(Exx+Eyy): Calculates the two dimensional divergence in xyplane. 2D-Div-xz -(Exx+Ezz): Calculates the two dimensional divergence in xzplane. 2D-Div-yz -(Eyy+Ezz): Calculates the two dimensional divergence in yzplane. 3D-Div-xyz -(Exx+Eyy+Ezz): Determines the three dimensional divergence. This option can only be applied to dual frame vector buer e.g. with LaVision Dual Plane Stereo PIV system. -divergence Exx+Eyy: Calculates the negative divergence in xy-plane. |divergence| |Exx+Eyy|: Calculates the absolute value of the divergence in the xy-plane.

11.6.5

Operation: extract scalar eld: rotation and shear

DaVis calculates the vorticity according to the central dierence scheme with the four closest neighbors (see gure 11.3). Compared to other methods the small spatial kernel allows a high spatial resolution. If any sort of spatial smoothing is required you may use the standard lter for scalar images.
-u0-

v-0

-v+0

u0+

Figure 11.3: Example of vorticity calculation

rot-z Eyx-Exy: Determines the two dimensional vorticity in xy-plane. -rot-z -(Eyx-Exy): Determines the negative two dimensional vorticity in xy-plane. rot-y Exz-Ezx: Determines the two dimensional vorticity in xz-plane. rot-x Ezy-Eyz: Determines the two dimensional vorticity in yz-plane. 250

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

swirling strength: Calculates the swirling strength given by 2 2 max 0, Exy Eyx (Exx Eyy )/2 + (Exx + Eyy )/4 i.e. only the positive part of the swirling strength ci , the rest is set to zero to display swirl only. shear strength: Calculates the shear strength given by 2 2 max 0, Exy Eyx (Exx Eyy )/2 + (Exx + Eyy )/4 i.e. only the negative part of the swirling strength ci , the rest is set to zero to display the shear only. swirl & shear: Calculates the swirling- plus shear-strength given by 2 2 Exy Eyx (Exx Eyy )/2 + (Exx + Eyy )/4 i.e. the imaginary portion ci of the complex eigenvalue of the local velocity gradient tensor. References
Adrian RJ, Christensen KT, Liu ZC (2000) Analysis and interpretation of instantaneous turbulent velocity elds , Exp. in Fluids, 29/3, p. 275-290

11.6.6

Operation: extract scalar eld: strain

All magnitudes in this group are based on the strain Tensor Eij = Vi /j with i {x, y, z} and j {x, y, z} It is the change (gradient) in the vector component i when going along the j axis. For example: Exx = dVx /dx is the gradient of Vx along x axis direction and represents a compression or an expansion. Exy = dVx /dy is the change of Vx along the y-axis direction and represents a horizontal shear. Now the vectors in a vector buer exist only on a discrete (regular) grid, so internally the components of the strain tensor are calculated as an approximation Eij = Vi /j Vi = j. Depending on what vectors are present the calculation uses dierent vectors to calculate Vi and their distances j. For example for the vector index position (n, m) the calculation of the magnitude Exy (n, m) is done this way: if the left and right neighbor vector exist you calculate Exy (n, m) = (Vx (n, m + 1) Vx (n, m 1))/2 vectorgrid 251

11 Batch Processing

else if only the left neighbor exist and the vector itself Exy (n, m) = (Vx (n, m) Vx (n, m 1))/vectorgrid else if only the right neighbor exist and the vector itself Exy (n, m) = (Vx (n, m + 1) Vx (n, m))/vectorgrid else Exx = 0 (disabled) Many other quantities are calculated from these components (formula is given in each case) to give new quantities, as for example maximum normal strain (also called principle strain). It represents the strain component Exx in a rotated coordinated system by an angle p (at each position might be a dierent angle) such that Exx is maximized. strain Exx, Exy, Exz: Calculates the partial derivations of the x-velocity component V x/x, V x/y, V x/z. strain Eyx, Eyy, Eyz: Calculates the partial derivations of the y-velocity component V y/x, V y/y, V y/z. strain Ezx, Ezy, Ezz: Calculates the partial derivations of the x-velocity component V z/x, V z/y, V z/z. strain rate Exx-Eyy: Calculates the strain rate Exx Eyy . |strain rate| |Exx-Eyy|: Calculates the absolute value of the strain rate Exx Eyy . (Exy+Eyx)/2: is the average 2D shear (Exy + Eyx )/2 To see the formulas of the following modes more easily we will introduce two abbreviations: d1 = (Exx + Eyy )/2 d2 = |(Exx Eyy )2 /4 + (Exy + Eyx )2 /4|

maximum normal strain 2D: d1 + d2; minimum normal strain 2D: d1 d2; maximum shear strain 2D: d2 maximum strain angle 2D: p = arctan(y, x) = arctan(Exy +Eyx , Exx Eyy ) 252

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

maximum shear strain 2D: s = arctan(y, x) = arctan(Exx Eyy , Exy +Eyx ) poisson ratio -strain max/strain min: Calculates the poisson ratio -(d1+d2)/(d1d2). poisson ratio -Eyy/Exx: Calculates the poisson ratio Eyy /Exx . poisson ratio -strain min/strain max: Calculates the poisson ratio (d1d2)/(d1+d2). 3D shear: calculates the maximum eigenvalue - minimum eigenvalue of the strain tensor (only works for multi-z vector elds as derived in Tomo-PIV where Ezz exists). 3D swirl strength (lambda-2): calculates the value lambda-2 in terms of the eigenvalues of the symmetric tensor S 2 + 2 where S and are the symmetric and the antisymmetric parts of the velocity gradient tensor V (refer to J.Fluid.Mech. (1995), vol 285, pp6994 : "On the Identication of a vortex" by Jinhee Jeong and Fazle Hussain) (only works for multi-z vector elds as derived in Tomo-PIV where Ezz exists). min. normal strain on surface: Calculates the minimum normal strain (see above) but choosing a local coordinate system such that the zdirection falls to the surface normal (suppressing the z-component in that direction). (only works for vector elds that contain a scalar plane with surface height information as derived in a StrainMaster3D system where a local surface normal can be calculated). max. normal strain on surface: Calculates the maximum normal strain (see above) but choosing a local coordinate system such that the zdirection falls to the surface normal (suppressing the z-component in that direction). (only works for vector elds that contain a scalar plane with surface height information as derived in a StrainMaster3D system where a local surface normal can be calculated)

11.6.7

Operation: extract scalar eld: others

di. to 4 neighb.: Determines the local derivation from the average of 4 neighboring vectors. di. to 8 neighb.: Determines the local derivation from the average of 8 neighboring vectors. stream function: The stream function is computed by rst setting the top row of the output buer to zero and then integrating vertically over x, e.g. F (x, y) = y =0,y Vx (x, y ). 253

11 Batch Processing

max. surface curvature: Calculates the maximum of one of the two second derivatives in x and y direction of the surface height scalar eld which is the equivalent to the maximum curvature in that direction (most suitable for cylinders). (only works for vector elds that contain a scalar plane with surface height information as derived in a StrainMaster3D system where a local surface normal can be calculated). avg. surface curvature: Calculates the average of the two second derivatives in x and y direction of the surface height scalar eld which is the equivalent to the maximum curvature in that direction (most suitable for samples with surface normal in any directions and arbitrary surface height distributions containing local maxima, minima and saddle points). (only works for vector elds that contain a scalar plane with surface height information as derived in a StrainMaster3D system where a local surface normal can be calculated). surface angle to z-axis: Calculates the inclination of the surface height distribution in respect to the z-axis. (only works for vector elds that contain a scalar plane with surface height information as derived in a StrainMaster3D system where a local surface normal can be calculated)

11.6.8

Operation: extract proles : Vr / Vangle (polar coordinates)

The operation proles of Vr / Vangle allows to extract a family of proles of Vr , Vangle (in respect to a user specied origin), Vx , Vy , Vz values along the circumference of concentric circles with xed radius in respect to a user specied origin or radial lines in respect to a user specied origin. See the following two screenshots of hte parameter dialog:

254

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

The number of proles in the family, the number of samples as well as the min/max value that dene the boundaries of the family of proles can be specied. The origin can either be set with mouse (press the button labeled Dene origin by mouse) or dened directly entering the pixel position in the corresponding text elds. Pressing Show current position in Source Window will draw the currently selected position in the source window buer (if visible) as overlay graphics. In the group box Position of proles in polar coordinates you dene how the proles are taken (prole for constant radius or prole constant angle). For the current mode you select the number of proles and the minimum and maximum radius (or angle) for which proles should be extracted. Furthermore you dene the number of sampling points for each prole. Pressing Show positions will blend in an overly graphics in the Source window (if visible) to show the position of the proles for the currently selected min / max values and the specied origin. The following screenshots show examples for the extraction of such proles: See the following two screenshots of the parameter dialog:

255

11 Batch Processing

11.6.9

Operation: time series

sliding average: Calculates for each vector position the sliding average over n consecutive vector elds: Average length: Number of consecutive vector elds which will be used for the sliding average calculation. Use lagrangian summing mode: Store every: Use this option to reduce the number of result vector elds. sum up ((1),(1+2),(1+2+3),...): Sum up all previous vector elds. Use lagrangian summing mode: Store every: Use this option to reduce the number of result vector elds. sum up n((1+2...n),((n+1)+(n+2)...(2n)),...): Sum up the last n vector elds. Use lagrangian summing mode: Store every: Use this option to reduce the number of result vector elds. shift and rotation correction: Gets the vector at a specied position and subtract this from the whole vector eld. Use this operation to correct a dierent vector shift between consecutive vector elds. If the Rotation correction is enabled the operation corrects the angle between the reference position and the Rotation search window. 256

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

Set correction reference point: Press button Rect. to specify the position. Rotation correction: Enable/disable rotation correction. Search window: Specify the search window for the calculation of the angle between the reference point and this area.

11.6.10

Operation: non-linear lter

LES decomposition: Decomposition of a vector eld according to large eddy simulation by separating the space spectrum of the eld into two (or more) groups. This type of decomposition is extremely useful in visualizing small-scale turbulent eddies as it removes the translation of the larger-scale eld. The domain for the calculation of the local mean velocity can be specied using the Length n textbox. Following modes can be selected: High pass <n : Returns high frequencies < n by calculation of the local mean velocity for a given vector eld and subtraction of the local mean velocity from the vector eld. Low pass >n : Returns low frequencies > n by calculation of the local mean velocity for a vector eld. High pass <n, <2n,. . . , 2N n: High pass lter with gradually increased domain for the calculation of the local mean velocity. End condition for the decomposition is 2N n < min(Nvh , Nvv ) with Nvh , Nvh number of vectors in the given eld in horizontal or vertical direction. The results are written to a multiframe vector buer. Low pass >n, >2n,. . . , 2N n: Low pass lter with gradually increased domain for the calculation of the local mean velocity. Since 2m n <number of vectors (vertically or horizontally) the vector eld is decomposed, the results are written to a multiframe vector buer. Range 0-n, n-2n,. . . , 2N 1 n 2N n: Decomposition of the vector eld according to a band pass lter of a gradually increased domain of the size 2N 1 n 2N n by calculating High pass > 2N n and subtraction of High pass 2N 1 n. Length n: Species the domain for the calculation of the local mean velocity in units of interrogation windows (or vectors). denoising and robust smoothing: This advanced lter helps to take out the noise (spurious vectors) from the vector eld. For all positions in 257

11 Batch Processing

the vector eld it successively looks in the neighborhood for the specied number of vectors for smoothing N oV ectors closest vectors to the given position in the source and replaces the vector in the result vector eld as a function of the N oV ectors vectors and the specied smoothing mode mode.

For ignore up to N Outliers, N =0 this function works as follows: To all N oV ectors vectors either a constant is tted (mode=Simple Averaging), a polynomial of rst order in x and y direction (mode=Polynomial t of 1st order, which is a linear gradient in x and y) or a polynomial of second order (mode=Polynomial t of 2nd order, which are a combination the functions changing with x, y, x2 , y 2 and x y). Then the vector in question (at the center) is replaced by the value of the tted function at that position. For ignore up to N Outliers, N =1 this function works as follows: For the found N oV ectors neighbours N oV ectors subsets of N oV ectors 1 vectors are formed (in each a dierent Outlier was thrown out. The t is performed as described above and the vector in question (at the center) is replaced by the value at that position of the tted function with the smallest t error. This is most probably the function where an irritating (a spurious vector if there really was any) is missing because it has the smoothest gradients. For ignore up to N Outliers, N =2 this function works as follows: For the found N oV ectors neighbours N oV ectors (N oV ectors 1)/2 subsets of N oV ectors 1 vectors are formed (in each a dierent pair of Outliers was thrown out). Again the tted function with the smallest 258

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

t error is used to replace the vector at the position in question by the value of the tted function. For ignore up to N Outliers, N =3 this function works as for N = 2, only that : N oV ectors (N oV ectors 1)(N oV ectors 2)/(2 3) subsets exist where dierent triplets are missing. Clearly for a higher number N of outliers the necessary time to calculate the t of all subsets is starting to grow very, very fast. But the advantage is that while a spurious vector can be replaced nicely by a predicted value taking into account gradients of second order, it will not itself enter in the calculation of all neighbors itself, because most likely the best t for the other positions is to ignore it as an outlier. In areas where no spurious vectors are present the gradients (up to 2nd order) will not be disturbed. For a number greater than 1 in the eld passes this process is done iteratively the specied number of passes.

11.6.11

Operation: statistics

vector eld result: the result is a vector eld

Calculation with scaled vector values: When this ag is on the calculation is done with scaled vectors. This is important when averaging vector elds with a dierent PivDt value as these elds have a dierent I-Scales, i.e. the same particle image shift in pixel corresponds to a dierent velocity value. On the other hand it is favorable to average unscaled values (pixel derivation) if the I-Scale is the same on all vector elds and further operations including the original images, e.g. subtract average) are to be performed. Average V: When this ag is on the average vector eld Vavg is calculated for the given number of vector elds according to the equation Vavg = 1/n n Vi . Only vectors that are not disabled i=1 are taken into account. 259

11 Batch Processing

RMS V: When this ag is on the RMS derivation vector eld Vrms is calculated for the given number of vector elds according to the equation Vrms = 1/(n 1) n (Vi Vavg )2 . Only vectors that i=1 are not disabled are taken into account. Use threshold of minimum = N source Vs to accept result V: When the ag is on a result vectors are created only in those places where at least N vector elds contributed with a valid vector. Include only Vs inside (preliminary) AVG +- N RMS: In this case the set of vector elds is scanned twice. In the rst pass a preliminary average / RMS vector is calculated at each position using the vectors from all vector elds. In the second pass only vectors are used that fall within the range of Vavg N VRM S to Vavg + N VRM S (componentwise) to calculate the nal result. This way outliers (spurious vectors) far outside the average vector are taken out. Please note that if you are using this option the calculation time doubles. Normalize vector elds to length of Average V: When the ag is on each value in the result will be normalized to the average vector length at that position. scalar eld result: the result is a scalar eld

Calculation with scaled vector values: When this ag is on the calculation is done with scaled vectors. This is important when averaging vector elds with a dierent PivDt value as these elds have a dierent I-Scales, i.e. the same particle image shift in pixel corresponds to a dierent velocity value. On the other hand it is favorable to average unscaled values (pixel derivation) if the I-Scale 260

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

is the same on all vector elds and further operations including the original images, e.g. subtract average) are to be performed. Average of Vx, Vy, Vz, |V|: When the corresponding ags are on the scalar elds of the average Vx-, Vy-, Vz-value and/or the average absolute velocity value is calculated on the given number of vector elds. Only vectors that are not disabled are taken into account. RMS of Vx, Vy, Vz, |V|: When the corresponding ags are on the scalar elds of the rms of Vx-, Vy-, Vz-value and/or the average absolute velocity value is calculated on the given number of vector elds. Only vectors that are not disabled are taken into account. Reynolds stress of xy, xz, yz, xx, yy, zz: When the corresponding ags are on the the scalar elds of the Reynolds stress xy, xz, yz, xx, yy and/or zz is calculated on the given number of vector elds. The equation e.g. for the xy case is VRSxy = 1/n n ((Vi Vavg )x (Vi Vavg )y ). i=1 Only vectors that are not disabled are taken into account. Kinetic energy: When the corresponding ags are on the scalar elds of the Average kinetic energy Eake = |Vavg |2 and/or the Turbulent kinetic energy Etke = |Vrms |2 is calculated on the given number of vector elds. Please note the following for 2D vector elds (no Vz component): Turbulence is a 3D phenomena - so it is reasonable to assume, that the 3rd component behaves like the other two.
2 If you calculated the quantity 1/2VRM S for a 2D vector eld you are using 2 components only. So each of V x and V y add each with 2 1/4VRM S . The third component (invisible so far) will add another 2 1/4VRM S , so the result of the output value is 2 2 2 Etke = 1/2VRM S + 1/4VRM S = 3/4VRM S

in the case of a 2D vector eld, but of course

2 Etke = 1/2VRM S

in the case of a 3D vector eld. This is a reasonable assumption as turbulence indeed produce 3D eddies which are visible in a 3 component vector eld. This dierence is not the case in the Eavg calcualtion as no statistical assumtion can be made for the 3rd component looking at the behaviour of the rst two components. 261

11 Batch Processing

Use threshold of minimum = N source Vs to accept result V: When the ag is on a result vectors are created only in those places where at least N vector elds contributed with a valid vector. Include only Vs inside (preliminary) AVG +- N RMS: In this case the set of vector elds is scanned twice. In the rst pass a preliminary average / RMS vector is calculated at each position using the vectors from all vector elds. In the second pass only vectors are used that fall within the range of Vavg N VRM S to Vavg + N VRM S (componentwise) to calculate the nal result. This way outliers (spurious vectors) far outside the average vector are taken out. Please note that if you are using this option the calculation time doubles. Normalize vector elds to length of Average V: When the ag is on each value in the result will be normalized to the average vector length at that position. This can be useful to calculate the degree of turbulence dened as n (V Vi )2 /(nV ) where V is i=0 a velocity component and V the average over n images. Enlarge scalar eld: When the ag is on the scalar eld is enlarged with the grid size of the input vector elds to t the original image size. Smooth scalar elds: When the ag is on the scalar eld is smoothed over one vector grid when it is enlarged by bilinear interpolation. as postproc. lter: the AVG / RMS statistic is used to disable / throw out spurious vector from vector elds in a set

Use threshold of minimum = N source Vs to accept result V: When the ag is on a result vectors are created only in those places where at least N vector elds contributed with a valid vector. Include only Vs inside (preliminary) AVG +- N RMS: In this case the set of vector elds is scanned twice. In the rst pass a preliminary average / RMS vector is calculated at each position using the vectors from all vector elds. In the second pass only vectors are used that fall within the range of Vavg N VRM S to 262

11.6 Available Groups for Data Source: Vector eld

Vavg + N VRM S (componentwise) to calculate the nal result. This way outliers (spurious vectors) far outside the average vector are taken out. Please note that if you are using this option the calculation time doubles. space time correlation: For a specied vector position a scalar map is calculated holding the correlation value of all the vectors (at the corresponding vector position) to that specied vector position. The formula for the component i of the vector V (x, y) and the specied position (xo /yo ) is: Corr(V (x, y)i ) =
1 N

(x, y)i V (xo , yo )i RM S(x, y) RM S(xo , yo )

N n=1 V

which is propoerly normalized so that correlation values fall between -1 (anti correlation = negative movement), 0 = noise (no correlation) and 1 = identical vectors (this is always the case for the specied position). Values between 0 and 1 show the degree of similarity in the behaviour of each position (changes of the vector over time) to the specied position. You can select for which vector components this is done (see following parameter dialog). The specied vector position can be shown on the batch processing dialog source image if you press the Show button. Pressing the button + Point let you select the vector position a mouse click into the vector eld in the source window. Alternatively you may adjust the vector grid position using the spin buttons to the side of it directly or enter numbers manually.

The other settings are the same as for the calculation of the average and RMS vector eld (see above). power spectrum : scalar eld result: For a given point (xo /yo ) the power spectrum is calcualted by: () = 1 F () F () 2 263

11 Batch Processing

where F () is the discrete-time Fourier transform of the series of values V (xo , yo )i over time. This operation calculates the power spectrum as a scalar map showing the coecients of the Fourier series at each corresponding position for all frequencies. In the top group you specify the source of the calcualtion. It can either be a multi frame vector buer or a series of single frame buers. Furthermore you select a vector component or the vector length used for the calculation. In the group below you set up parameters for the calculation. The window weight function is an additional weighting in the convolution of the data to avoid boundary eects at the beginning / end of the data. Below that you selcet what kind of results you want to have. Avialable results are all power spectra: this will create a multi frame image with the coecients of the corresponding frequency terms for each position peak frequency map: holds the frequency that had the maximum coecient at the corresponding position. Energy map (E(v1 v2)/Etotal: holds the fraction of the energy present in the coecient of the frequency range v1 to v2 compared to the total energy.

power spectrum : prole result: The parameters are basically the same as above but the calculation is done only for one point. The corresponding coecients are shown in plot versus frequency in Hz. To suppress noise level additionally several proles are calculated in an area of 3x3 264

11.7 Overlay Editor

(and/or 5x5 and/or 7x7) and then averaged to get a less noisy averaged result from the local neighbourhood.

11.7

Overlay Editor

Overlays are user dened painting structures (lines, polygons, ellipses, texts), which are connected to buers or cameras and automatically painted above the 2D-image display of a buer. The overlay display can be enabled or disabled in the Data and Display Attributes dialog (see page 134). For information about programming overlays with CL macros please read the Command Language manual. Overlays are connected to a buer as buer attributes, and they are stored together with the buers raw data in le types IM7, IMG, IMX, VEC and VC7. The Overlay Editor dialog of gure 11.4 can be opened from the batch processing function add overlay in group attributes and from the Buer menu in DaVis Classic. An overlay is painted either in every frame of a buer or in a single frame only. In the upper left line of the dialog the active frame can be selected, starting with index 0, or the all frames denition. The list below includes all dened objects for the active frame. When selecting an object, the type, position and other parameters are displayed and the overlay object itself is painted in the buer view on the right. To paint all overlay objects of the active frame and get a test view, please press the view all button. Button copy will create a complete copy of the selected object, but changes the objects name. A single object can be deleted, and the complete frame objects can be destroyed by button Delete All. Note: There is no possibility to undo the last changes! 265

11 Batch Processing

Figure 11.4: Overlay Editor dialog

To dene a new object, press on one of the bitmap buttons with symbols text, rectangle, polygon, ellipse, circle and line. After pressing the button, the mouse cursor is activated to wait for the user input and the status line on bottom of the DaVis main window gives information about the requested input: For a text object the upper left corner of the text area must be selected with the left mouse button. For a rectangle or line the rst and second position must be selected, for a circle or ellipse the center and a radius position. For a polygon all positions must be selected, and when nishing the user has to press a key: q to quit the denition, c to close the object or o to get an open polygon. Each object parameter can be changed manually after denition: the name, pencolor and llcolor, the penwidth and the positions. With the Set button each position can be redened by a mouse click in the buer view. For a text object the text itself and some style settings are available. By default each object is visible and painted on screen. If the mode is disabled, the object is not painted but available for a later enabling without deleting and recreating the parameters. With the le items in the lower left part of the dialog, open le and save le, the active overlay can be stored or reloaded. This is an easy way to save an overlay and later use it again in the same or another buer. The overlay can be exported to the mask buer, either the active overlay or the complete buer overlay. During the export the intensity values of the pixels inside the objects and outside of all objects can be dened. Also the export can be done to another buer or even to a camera: Each camera can 266

11.8 Mask Denition

use an individual overlay deniton, which is copied into the buer at the end of image acquisition automatically. Press the Back button in the toolbar to return to the last dialog or to the DaVis screen in Classic mode.

11.8

Mask Denition

A mask is used for specifying an arbitrary region in the image where something should be computed. A mask buer may be an image or a vector eld. In both cases only then a pixel or a vector is accepted or computed, if the value in the mask buer is non-zero at the corresponding position. In some projects it is possible to pass any displayed image to the mask dialog by selection of the send to mask dialog entry in the send to submenu of the context (accessable with a click of the right mouse button in the displayed image). If a vector le is passed via send to rst the vector length will be extracted and the resulting scalar eld passed to the mask dialog.

Figure 11.5: Dialog for mask denition. The upper part of the mask dialog (see gure 11.5) shows the parameter settings while the lower part displays the source image on the left and the masked image on the right. The displayed width of both images can be changed by the slider below the images. To load another source image, please press the load image button on the upper right of the dialog. The display parameters can 267

11 Batch Processing

be easily changed after pressing the right mouse button in the image window and selecting Display Properties in the context menu. There are three possible operation modes to create a mask: load xed mask from le simply loads a previously calculated mask from a le. The mask can be loaded pressing the Load button user dened mask allows to dene the masked area with geometrical elements (rectangle, circle, ellipse, polygon) In this mode the user can create a number of objects by mouse and then use either the inside of a single object or the outside as valid region. The intersection of all these masked areas is denes the nal masked area. create algorithmic mask with operation pipeline taking the current image and use digital lters on it. After all operations had been applied all the pixels with a value of 0 counts are masked out. A typical procedure would be to smooth the image suciently before subtracting a threshold, which sets all unwanted regions to zero. This can be done easiliy using the dialog described further down in gure 11.7 create user dened + algorithmic mask rst the geometrical mask is applied to reduce the masked area to a certain region then on the remaining pixels further pixels can be sorted out using tha algoritmic operation pipeline. When nishing the mask creation, the current mask can be save current mask to le as xed mask into a le and reloaded at the next program start. Additionally the current dialog settings of the dialog can be stored or loaded by the buttons near dialog settings on the upper right and reloaded e.g. to retrieve good settings for the algorithmic operation pipeline.

Figure 11.6: Parameter settings for user dened mask in the Mask dialog. To create a user dened mask you may add new elements to rene your mask by pressing rst one of the blue or red buttons representing the graphical 268

11.8 Mask Denition

elements rectangle, circle, ellipse and polygon and then click into the (left) image displayed to dene the object. For a rectangle two opposite angles are be given. For circle / ellipse the center position and the radius are dened. For a polygon any number of points can be added. Pressing "c" closes the polygon and ends the point adding. "d" deletes the last entry and "q" quits the entry and discards the polygon. Pressing the buttons Clear last item (of X) deletes the last dened objects in the list of X itmes (may be pressed several times to undo all changes) and Clear all items clear the whole list to start all over again with an empty list. The text next to it informs on the number of objects dened so far. To create a mask in algorithmic mode a number of dierent operations can be selected in the list on the right. Press button Recalculate now to use the image on the left side as source for the calculation and display the new mask on the right side.

Figure 11.7: Parameter settings for algorithmic mask in the Mask dialog.

Eliminate all 0 counts: It is strongly recommended that this option is selected initially, so that zero pixels in the original image do not lead to unwanted masked out pixels. Pixel with intensity 0 are not used during an operation. Invert image I(x,y)=Imax-I(x,y)+N and add an intensity oset N. Smoothing over N N pixel. Sliding average/maximum/minimum lter over N N pixel. Median lter over N N pixel. The median lter is a non-linear lter not working with the simple matrix equation above. The median lter takes a N N area and sorts all elements according to their intensity. 269

11 Batch Processing

Then the middle element is stored back as the new center pixel. Just like the other smoothing lter, it will eliminate high frequency noise. As an advantage it does not eliminate sharp edges as much as the other lters. On the other hand this lter is non-linear, i.e. the average intensity of the image may change. The median lter works mathematically very similar to the erosion and dilatation lter discussed below, which have a very dierent behavior. Above/below threshold sets the intensity above or below a given threshold to 0 counts. Erosion: Just like the median lter this lter will sort the pixels of a 3x3-area according to their intensity. But instead of taking the middle element, the erosion will take the element before. The eect is a kind of erosion, valley become deeper and nally the image will be eroded away toward the background level. Dilate: The dilatation lter does exactly the opposite of the erosion. It will take the next element after the middle one in the sorting list. The eect is that edges become sharper while plateaus atten and become more even. Binarize image to 0, 10000 counts: will set all pixels to either 0 if they were 0 before or to 10000 otherwise. This options is useful to distinguish low-count pixels from 0. The image may also be inverted afterwards. Note that sometimes it is easier to dene the areas which must not be used e.g. for vector calculation. Local RMS: Any pixel value is replaced with the local RMS deviation to the average of its neighbours. This is a useful lter operation to mask out areas with high particle seeding for example. Image areas without or with poor particle seeding show a homogenoues (low) count distribution while areas with many particles have high local contrast (count value variations). The same applies to probes with speckle pattern. Replace value: to 0, 10000 counts: will set all pixels of the specied value to 0. This options is useful to use masks with a mask out value dierent from 0. Note that sometimes it is easier to dene the areas which must not be used e.g. for vector calculation. User function: A CL macro of the form macro(int inputoutputbuer, int parameter) can be specied that is called with the image in the currently active state of the operation pipeline and the given parameter 270

11.8 Mask Denition

value. The macro should return the changed buer. This way it is possible to write your own lters. Sometimes an image already has very low count pixels. In the displayed mask on the right these counts are very dicult to distinguish from masked out pixels (which by denition have 0 counts). To make this easier you can "binarize" the image (as explained in the algorithmic mask) , but then the image structure is lost, that is you do not "see" if all the pixels you wished to mask out actually are. To remedy this select the check box labeled add 100 counts oset to masked area. This will add 100 counts to the image in those areas that are not masked out and let the masked out area its 0 count value. This way the masked out area is clearly visible and the image structure are still displayed e.g. outline of probe, particle seeding, experiment setup. Be aware that this display mode shows 100 count to high pixel values. Algorithmic mask parameters (threshholds) are calculated always from the original image. Automatic display update updates the mask every time a parameter is changed. This may slow down the work ow severly depending on the selected mask creation mode. Recalculate now creates the mask when pressed just one time to test the current parameters. When using the mask in a Batchprocessing dialog operation (like vector calculation) the Recalculation mode can be set here: Or the mask is calcaalted one time for the rst image and then used for the rest of the set, or the mask is recreared for all the images in the set (possible for algorithmic mask only) or the mask is created for the rst image and then moved with the deforming object (useful ony for time series images).

271

11 Batch Processing

272

12 DaVis in Classic Style

12.1 Screen Layout

When the program is started in classic mode, the DaVis task window is set up as shown in gure 12.1. Here in contrast to the Project mode most dialogs are not maximized to t into the DaVis main window, they are smaller and can be positioned free inside the main window. The image windows can be positioned and resized free, too, while in the Project mode all images are embedded into the dialogs. With the help of a buer list, computation dialogs and macro calls the user can work directly on the buers and is not restricted to the functions of Project dialogs. The tool bar buttons of DaVis Classic are explained below. There are some special types of windows to be used in the work area, the Buer List, the Info Text and the Palette Window.

Figure 12.1: DaVis main window in classic style. All menus are described in the folowing sections: File Menu on page 278, Buer Menu on page 288, Rectangle Menu on page 290, Macro Menu on page 52, System or PIV/PTV, Compute Menu on page 293, Acquisition Menu on 273

12 DaVis in Classic Style

page 296, Devices Menu on page 298, Window Menu on page 299, Color Menu on page 277 and Help Menu on page 40.

12.2

Toolbar Buttons

The Tool bar provides buttons which allow execution of the most important functions with a single mouse click. When moving the mouse cursor above the toolbar buttons, a short description about the button function is displayed in the Status Text. The buttons, there meaning and shortcut keys are from left to right:

Load buer, F9

Save buer, CTRL+F9

Export active buer or view Open buer properties dialog, CTRL+B Select active rectangle Open buer statistics dialog Display prole buer Open movie dialog, CTRL+M

Stop button, ESCAPE

If hardware access is available: Open camera parameters dialog, F8

Take single image, F10

Zoom in, F2

Continuous grabbing, F11

Zoom out, F3 274

12.3 Special Windows

Set optimal view size, F5 Select or edit zoom factor Resolution down, key + Resolution up, key Set optimal resolution, CTRL+O Select resolution from list

12.3
12.3.1

Special Windows
Buer List

The Buer List is usually shown on the right side. It contains the numbers, type (see table 12.1) and names of all loaded and generated images and of all empty buers. A single click with the left mouse button on a line activates the buer and opens a simple image window. A double click opens the Buer Properties dialog. The scrollbar can be used to change the displayed buer range. The display of this window can be switched o and on via item Buer List in menu Window.

Figure 12.2: The Buer List window with information about all loaded and generated buers. After pressing the right mouse button on a buer line, a popup menu is displayed with nearly the same functions as in the context menu described on page 157. Additional items in this menu can be used to load a le into this buer or to save the buer. 275

12 DaVis in Classic Style

P L F D C V S* L*

Word (16 bit integer) image Packed Word (8 bit integer) image Long (32 bit integer) image Float (32 bit) image Double (64 bit) image Color (32 bit RGB) image Vector eld Sparse data storage (additional character) Buer is locked (additional character)

Table 12.1: Type character of buers in the buer list. The characters with * are added as second information to the type.

Active Buer

The active buer is marked in reverse colors in the buer list window. A single click with the left mouse button on a line activates the buer and opens a simple image window. A double click opens the Buer Properties dialog. If the buer list window is focused (has a bright blue title bar), pressing the DELETE key will delete the active buer.

Lock a Buer

A locked buer is secured against overwriting. Locked buers are marked by a letter L in the buer list window. To lock a buer click with the right right mouse button inside the image and select Lock/Unlock in the pull down menu, or do the same in the pulldown menu of the buer list window, or select the locked checkbox in the buer properties dialog. 276

12.3 Special Windows

12.3.2

Palette (CLUT) Window

On the left side of the DaVis screen (by default) the active color table is shown in a Color Palette Window. This palette window can be moved in the main window to a free position. The intensities of images are displayed according to this color distribution. The bottom color corresponds to the lowest intensities (0) increasing to the top (255). The number under the color bar corresponds to the number of the active palette. In order to change the active palette go to the color menu or scan through the dierent palettes using the buttons + and directly below the color bar. Press button "..." to open the Palette Selection dialog (see page 139). RGB-Color Code in Status Line Move the cursor to a certain color in the color bar and the corresponding RGB (red, green, blue) values of this color are displayed in the status line.

Vector Palettes If the active buer is of vector type, the palette window resizes and presents a second color table with + and buttons to select the active palette for the vector display (the vector arrows) and the vector background palette, which may be dierent from the image palette. Color Menu In submenu Set Palette of menu Window the user can select the active palette, either for the images, for vector display or for the vector background. Self construction of a palette is possible via the Edit Palette dialog, see page 130.

12.3.3

Info Text Window

The Info Window (see gure 12.3) is used to display results of executed functions. When writing own macros, the programmer can display online information or debugging information. The text inside the info window is acces277

12 DaVis in Classic Style

sible to the user. It can be marked and then copied inside DaVis or to other applications.

Figure 12.3: The Info Text Window for runtime logging information.

12.4

File Menu

The File menu includes standard Windows functions for data transfer, printing and exiting the program. See the sections about loading and saving a le for more information about the input and output of buer data. Function Load/Save allows to load and store a set of acquired images and the corresponding parameters. The Filebrowser is a convenient way to browser and load image les. Import/Export allows to load and store dierent sources (e.g. buers and les) into other destinations (buers, other le formats) usualy loosing some image information. And the Export functions can be used to create screenshots. Another type of export is the Printing of image windows. With the function Save Settings all recent settings are stored. The Customer Settings can be used to change the system menu or startup commands. The Global Options dialog gives access to a number of basic settings for DaVis. Both dialogs are described on page 47. Item Personal Labbook opens the dialog from page 47.

278

12.4 File Menu

12.4.1

Load File and Save File

After selecting the menu item File Load or after pressing the F9 key, a le selection box opens. The user can select more than one le: Press the Ctrlkey during the selection and click some single les to be loaded, or press the Shift-key to select a range of les. After a multiple le selection a dialog box opens and asks for one of the following actions: display all les after loading, display the rst le only, no display, or open the Movie dialog (see page 290). More details about loading les are given in section Buer Input and Output on page 281.

12.4.2

Printing a Window

The function Print opens the standard Windows dialog box for the setup of the printer. Here a printer can be selected if more than one device is connected to the PC, or printing into a le can be enabled. After closing the dialog, the active image window is printed. The active image window is printed according to the default printer settings. If the Print After Setup has been executed before, this functions uses the settings dened in the last setup.

12.4.3

Save Settings

The function Save Settings stores all recent settings, e.g. the hardware settings and the default image display attributes. Calling this function is useful when trying to change some settings without loosing the old values. More specically, the current values of all static variables in the loaded CLles are stored back into the corresponding CL-les. See the Command Language Manual for more details on static variables.

12.4.4

Logout and Exit

When selecting item Logout in the File menu, DaVis Classic closes all dialogs and all image windows and returns to the User Login dialog (see page 42). When selecting item Exit or when pressing the hotkeys ALT+F4, DaVis deletes all data from memory and shuts down.

12.4.5

Edit Customer Settings

With the Edit Customer Settings dialog of gure 12.4 the user can dene entries for the system menu, create some startup functions and change the current settings of DaVis, e.g. use dierent hardware settings on the same PC. 279

12 DaVis in Classic Style

Warning: This dialog should be used by advanced users only! It is possible to delete all hardware settings!

Figure 12.4: Edit Customer Settings dialog

Card Menu There is one menu available in DaVis to hold customer dened items, the System or PIV/PTV menu. The title of this menu can be changed to the entered value. The columns names and commands dene the menu items and the macro command, which is executed when the user selects the menu item. To load a macro le and execute an included command, the command has to get the syntax @filename:command. Card Files It is possible to dene up to ve macro les, which are loaded at the start DaVis before the hardware is initialized. This CL-les must resist in the CLsubdirectory. Press button Test to check if the dened macro les exist. Card Execute The user can dene macros to be executed before or after hardware initialization at the start of DaVis. Another macro will be executed at the end of the shutdown function just before DaVis exists. Card Groups When starting for the rst time DaVis loads all customer settings from a le #<serialnumber>.SET in the CL subdirectory. This le includes predened 280

12.5 Buer Input and Output

values for lots of variables. This (static) variables belong to the attached groups. Variables of other groups or non-static variables are not included. To dene the variables to be stored in a set le, please select the corresponding groups in the lower list, which includes all groups with static variables. Then press the left arrow button to add the group to the upper list. Press button Save to store all static variables of the dened groups as customer settings in such a SET le. Press button Load to read the settings into memory. Note: When loading a SET-le, the recent settings are lost!

12.5
12.5.1

Buer Input and Output

Loading Buers

The function Load in menu Files reads a le of one of the above described formats into the active Buer. Also this function can be reached from the tool bar button and when pressing the F9 key. If the active buer (and the following buers if a sequence of les is loaded) are not empty, a small dialog opens to dene another destination buer, overwrite the buer or abort the operation. If it is important data, save the buer(s) in advance or activate another image buer. Another safe way to prevent accidental data destruction is locking it. This can be done after a click with the right mouse button onto the active image or the corresponding line in the buer list. If the destination buer is non-empty, a small dialog opens to abort the loading or to select another destination buer. If a SET is selected, the program opens the set data loading dialog (see page 287). Load several les In addition, it is possible to load several les from a leselectbox into a sequence of buers. Mark these les by using the keyboard and the mouse in the leselectbox: Hold the keys CTRL to add single les or SHIFT to add a range of les while selecting a new le with the left mouse button. Then press the Open button to load all the marked les. Drag and drop les DaVis supports dragging and dropping of les to load them into the active buer (and for multiple selection into the buers after the active one). Mark some les in the Windows Explorer, press the right mouse button on the selection, then move the mouse cursor into the DaVis main window (while 281

12 DaVis in Classic Style

the right mouse button stays pressed!) and leave the mouse button. Now the dropped les are loaded into consecutive buers. If a destination buer is not empty, the program will open a small dialog and asks for another destination buer or if you want to overwrite the buer. It is even possible to drop DaVis macro le (*.CL) into the main window. The macro les will be loaded and the macro functions can be used immediately. Importing AVI Movies If the user selects an AVI movie in the leselectbox when loading a buer, another dialog opens and displays the number of frames in this movie le (see gure 12.5). If the AVI les is larger than 1 GB, a warning is given. If you want to import frames from larger AVIs, please split the le into smaller parts.

Figure 12.5: Dialog to Import AVI movies into DaVis buers. The user can select a range of frames to be imported and even dene a step number to import every n-th frame. The color mapping of the frames, in most cases RGB color images, can be selected between three modes: simply average the three color components into an intensity value, convert the color into an intensity value via a function, which uses dierent factors for each component and rescues the gray level of each pixel, import real RGB buers, which is useful for background images, but not for calculations. Before pressing button Import to start the function, please think about the Creation mode: If the movie is small enough to t into the memory, is is possible to read the images into a single buer with a number of frames, or to create a consecutive number of buers, each including one frame. For a larger number of images the creation of a set directory is the best way to use all movie frames in DaVis, e.g. via the batch processing functions or in the movie dialog. 282

12.5 Buer Input and Output

12.5.2

Browse Image les (and load to buer)

The DaVis le browser (see gure 12.6) can be reached by the File menu entry Browse Files. It provides you with a convenient way to load an image le into a buer. While searching for the le a preview is shown to cross check the le contents and some basic information are given like le size, height and width in pixel, and the zoom factor used in the preview window. Select a le by clicking on its lename. Now a preview id shown to ist right and it may be loaded to a buer. Holding down the CRTL button lets you select multiple les while clicking on dierent lenames. Holding down the SHIFT button while clicking on another lename selects a range of les (between this selected lename and previously selected lename). When more than one le is selected, only the preview of rst in the list is shown. Load to buer loads all of them to consecutive buers.

Figure 12.6: The le browser dialog

The various elements of the le browser dialog are: In the texteld Root a path can be entered for a new Root folder (e.g. "C:/DataTL/SETS"). Only folders and les below this selected Root folder are shown. This avoids complex trees. If nothing ( ) is entered the desktop, all available drives are shown (A:, C:, ...) including all accessible drives of the network. In the File extension list a lter for the les is selected that should appear in the File selection box e.g: IM?,V??,IM7,IMX,IMG,VEC,BMP or *. The Tree View subwindow (left) and the File selection box (center) show the directory structure and the les contained in the selected folder like in the standard Windows Explorer. The Preview Subwindow (right) shows a thumbnail of the selected image le and the Info texteld below size and zoom of the image. The button Set to Root sets the selected folder in the le explorer as new Root directory. 283

12 DaVis in Classic Style

The button moves the selected directory one up, if Root is reached the Tree View Subwindow will be initialized with the Root directory above the current Root folder The button sets the Root folder to the path stored in the CL Variable DefaultBuerPath The button Load to Buer loads the selected image to the buer number selected in the text eld to the right of the button and opens the window.

12.5.3

Saving a Buer

The function Save in the menu File stores the active buer in a le. The le format can be IM7, IMX, IMG, VEC, TIF, FiTS, PS, JPG, BMP or B16 (see section File Formats on page 117 for more details). When storing as a bitmap note that high dynamic images with more than 256 grey-scales (eg. 12/14 bit slow scan images) are converted to 256 levels rst while ignoring the lowest bits. Select path and name of the le in a leselectbox and do some additional selections in the Save Edit dialog (see gure 12.7).

Figure 12.7: Dialog to edit some parameters for buer storage. At top of the box the buers name and acquisition time is presented. Below the user can change the lename or letype (note: no additional checks will be done for overwriting or a non-existing path!) or add a comment. Some letypes allow special settings. Cancel stops without storage. For multi-frame vector buers it is possible to store all frames below each other or a single frame only. The setting can be done by a special dialog item appearing for this special buer type only. 284

12.5 Buer Input and Output

12.5.4

Import of Buers

This function allows the import of image or vector les into a DaVis SET, which can be used later for batch processing jobs. The dialog of gure 12.8 is nearly the same as the Batch Processing dialog, so a batch operation can be executed during an import of les. At rst select the data source in the upper part of the dialog, then select the directory including the source les and enter the range and increment of les to be imported. The les must be indexed in some way, it is not possible to import les with completely dierent names. For a simple import the Group must be set to value o. To execute a batch operation during the import, a group and a function must be selected. In the lower part of the dialog the destination of the import is dened: The direct import into a range of buers and the creation of a DaVis SET le are the most important options. For a SET or a series of les the destination name must be selected. To execute the import please press button Start Processing.

Figure 12.8: Dialog to import les into DaVis.

12.5.5

Loading and Saving of SETs

Selecting letype SET in the leselectboxes for loading or for saving allows to load or store a set of acquired images together with the corresponding parameters. The SET le contains the parameters, while the image and vector les are stored in a subdirectory with the same name as the SET le. See page 122 for a detailed description. 285

12 DaVis in Classic Style

Storage of a Set The dialog of gure 12.9 is opened when the user selects a SET le in the leselectbox for buer storage. The details of the storage of image buers and their parameter SET le can be given in this dialog. For the group of les a comment can be given.

Figure 12.9: Dialog to edit some parameters for storage of a SET. If the SET should include parameters, the attached parameter groups must be selected. The list of groups can be Cleared or another dialog can be opened to select and Edit the list of groups.

Figure 12.10: Dialog to edit the list of attached variable groups for storage of a SET. On the left side of the Edit Group List dialog (see gure 12.10) the attached groups are listed. The list on the right side includes all not yet used groups. To attach another group to the list, select it on the right side and then click on 286

12.5 Buer Input and Output

the doubled arrow pointing to the left. Now the chosen group appears under attached groups on the left side. With a likewise action a group can be deleted from the list. When the selection is nished, click OK to return to the parent dialog. On bottom of the Save SET dialog the storage of buers can be switched on and o. Select the le types for storing vector and image buers. The range of buers to be stored must be given as first-last, e.g. when storing buers 5 to 62 one has to enter 5-62. At the end press button Save to start the storage or Cancel the dialog. In order to check the storage of your SET please delete your buers with function Delete All in the Buer menu. Then press button Load in the tool bar and select the new SET le.

Loading of a Set The dialog of gure 12.11 is opened when the user selects a SET le in the leselectbox for buer loading. The user can choose if the parameter groups should be loaded and if the data les should be loaded. Both parts of the SET can be loaded seperatly.

Figure 12.11: Dialog to dene the loading mode for a SET. Loading of the buers can be done by using the same buer locations as during the storage, or using the active buer and the consecutive buers following. Click on button Load to start the function or Cancel the dialog. 287

12 DaVis in Classic Style

12.6

Buer Menu

The Buer menu supports the management of buers, gives more information about the data and can be used to open dierent views of the data. With function View a new window can be opened to display the contents of an image or vector buer on the screen in one of the dierent view types. The Properties item opens the Data and Display Properties dialog, card Properties (see page 106), of the active buer. With the help of the other functions the user can edit the buer Overlays, delete the active buer or a range of image buers. A special dialog deals with the movie-like display of a number of image buers.

12.6.1

View

Figure 12.12: Menu Buer View Function View in the Buer menu (see gure 12.12) opens a new window on the screen and displays the buer information in the selected mode (images, proles ...). Every view window is marked with a dierent small icon on the top left in the title bar (see page 126 for a list of those items). Default: Automatically select a view type. In most cases this will be the Simple (2D) Image. For very small buers the Prole is taken, for multiframe vector buers the Multiframe Overview type. Simple (2D) Image: Display the active image buer in a new Simple (2D) Image Windows. Spreadsheet: Display the intensity values of the active image buer in a table arrangement. Further descriptions are given on page 165. 288

12.6 Buer Menu

Prole: Display a set of proles of the active image buer, which means that some horizontal lines (vertical for 1-column-buers) are displayed as intensity proles. Consult the chapter on Prole Windows on page 180 for more information. Multiframe Overview: Display all frames of a multiframe buer in a table of single frames. When the user zooms into the image and moves the viewpoint, the zoom and position is used for all frames immediately. 3D Prole: Display a 3D image of the active buer. The intensity is shown in the z-axis and in the usual false color code. See page 164 for more information. 3D Standard/Slice/Scene: Three dimensional view for 3D-buers (more than one Z-plane or multi frame) can be displayed in special windows. An OpenGL graphical driver must be installed on your PC to reach a fast image drawing and large frame rates, e.g. when moving through the 3D space. See page ?? for descriptions of the dierent 3D (OpenGL) Windows. When 3D Standard is selected, DaVis automatically opens the best 3D-view type for the active buer.

12.6.2

Delete Selected Buers

While function Delete frees memory by deleting the active image buer, this function deletes a range of image buers stored in the main memory in a single step.

Figure 12.13: Delete Selected Buers The dialog of gure 12.13 gives four dierent modes: All buers: delete all buers 289

12 DaVis in Classic Style

Buer range: all buers in the given range All below: delete all buers in the range 1,...,n-1 All above: delete all buers in the range n+1,... If delete locked buers is selected, all buers in the range will be deleted. In unselected mode, the locked buers will not be deleted (e.g. background buers).

12.6.3

Viewing Buers as a Movie

This function animates images or vector elds in a new window on the screen. The single buers are loaded to a display buer, no buers of the buer list are used for the temporary storage of the display, no buers will be overwritten or deleted. Source of the movie can be les, buers, sets and frames. For SETs and les the object must be selected with the help of a leselectbox, for buers and frames the buer number(s) must be entered. For all types a maximum range of available buers and the number of existing images is displayed. The range of buers to display as movie must be given, and a free increment can be dened e.g. to display every second image. In the lower part of dialog 12.14 the index of the active image is given during the movie and can be changed manually when stopping. The movie is running with a selected speed from slow (more or less 1 image per second) to fast (no extra pause between two images, only loading and display time as pause). Descriptions of the dierent symbols to play forward, backward or to stop are explained in table 12.2. When selecting the Compact mode, the dialog becomes smaller to display only the most important controls and nothing about the source selection.

12.7

Rectangle Menu
Rectangles are user dened areas inside an image buer. For a variety of functions a rectangle has to be set in advance. Then the executed function uses e.g. only pixels inside the active rectangle for the specied operation.

Function Show displays any rectangle inside the active image window. Choose either the number of one rectangle or enter -1 to display all eight rectangles 290

12.7 Rectangle Menu

Figure 12.14: The movie dialog.

< <| <> |> >

one image backward, if existing runs movie backward to the rst image forward to the last image, and then backward to the rst one forward to last image one image forward, if existing stops movie, when double clicked (may not work on fast computers). Movie can also be stopped by hitting the spacebar.

Speed

regulates how fast the movie runs repeating the movie until the user stops it.

Table 12.2: Play Control buttons in the Movie dialog.

at once. Click OK and the active buer is shown with the chosen rectangle (or all 8) inside it. Statistics of the active rectangle region of a buer are obtained with function Statistics. A Histogram can be created from an image or rectangular area of an image buer. Both menu items open the Data and Display Properties dialog (see pages 110 and 113). Dene Mask (active buer) opens a dialog to dene a mask for further processing. See page 267 for further descriptions on this dialog. Dene Mask (load le) asks the user to select a new mask le in a leselectbox. Function Show Mask displays the mask buer on screen. 291

12 DaVis in Classic Style

12.7.1

Active Rectangle
DaVis supports eight dierent rectangles for user dened areas, the rectangles are numbered from 1 to 8.

Rectangle 0 is reserved for the complete image buer. Rectangle number 9 is temporary used by dierent functions and can not be used by the user. The active rectangle is used by functions, which are designed to work on rectangular regions. The item in the toolbar always displays the number of the active rectangle (1-8) or if the complete buer is activated. Click on the button and scroll up or down to the desired number. The active rectangle is also marked with an A in the Set Rectangle dialog.

12.7.2

Set Rectangle

The Set Rectangles dialog (see gure 12.15) displays the coordinates of all eight user dened rectangles. This dialog can be used to dene the rectangles, to display them into the active image buer and to copy rectangular areas from the active buer into another buer.

Figure 12.15: Dialog to dene rectangles. To change coordinates either their values can be changed directly in the edit items, or a Set button can be pressed to select the position with the mouse in the active image window. A short message appears on the screen with a description what to do. Click on the rst corner, release the mouse button 292

12.8 Compute Menu

and click in the second corner of the new rectangle. Immediately the selected coordinates (x1,y1,x2,y2) appear in the dialog. The now dened rectangle is activated and marked with letter A behind the rectangle number. In the example above rectangle number one is marked as active and reaches from the upper left pixel in column 164 and row 322 to the lower right pixel in column 306 and row 494. All other rectangles include the single pixel at column 0 and row 0 only. Some additional buttons can be used to do something with the active rectangle in the active buer. Press button Cut to set all the pixel inside the active rectangle to value 0. Press button Fill to enter the new intensity value of the rectangular region. Copy in Rect will copy the active rectangle of the active buer into another rectangle of a destination buer. Copy in Buer copies the region into a new buer (and deletes everything which has been in this buer before!). Note: The way of dening a rectangle with the mouse can be switched into a dragging mode, if variable WindowDragRange is set to value 1. If this mode is enabled, click on the rst corner, drag the mouse with pressed left button to the second corner and release the mouse button.

12.8

Compute Menu
This menu presents some often used functions for computations. While all functions in DaVis can be entered as macro code via menu item Macro Execute Line, some functions are complicate to call (e.g. lots of parameters), so they are implemented in this menu: the linear and nonlinear lters.

Other menu items open advanced dialogs for the image distortion and correction, nonlinear curve tting and one of the most important dialogs in DaVis, the batch processing. The Line Measurement can be enabled, see page 156 for a description.

12.8.1

Overow, Underow

Whenever data arithmetic is performed, make sure that the operation does not lead to overow or underow. The conditions depend on the used buer type. 293

12 DaVis in Classic Style

If, nevertheless, an overow or underow occurs, the software will use the following default rules: Overow: Values larger than the upper limit of the data type word or oat are set equal to the upper limit (e.g. for a WORD buer = 65535). Underow: Values less than the lower limit of the data type (see above) are set equal to the lower limit (e.g. for a WORD buer = 0). Division by 0: A division by 0 leads to the value of the upper limit of the data type (e.g. for a WORD buer = 65535).

12.8.2

Segmentation Dialog

The Segmentation subroutine uses a large number of parameters, so its not easy to test and view the result. Therefore the dialog of gure 12.16 gives an interface to the user to calculate the segments and to view some segment statistics and histograms. The underlaying macro code can be copied into own macro functions.

Figure 12.16: The Segmentation dialog The input buer includes the source image. The found segments will be painted in dierent colors in the output buer. The color intensity is dened by 10 times the number of the segment. A histogram of some segment data can be painted in the succeeding buer (e.g. number 11). A histogram is presented in a prole window. The data is counted in a number of histogram slots, which are painted in columns. Data source can be one item of the list 294

12.8 Compute Menu

The number of found segments can be very large (> 10000) depending on the given image. A maximum number can be given to save calculation time when analyzing the returned segments. But you can not be sure which segments will be analyzed if their number is larger than the maximum. The result depends on the given threshold. A useful value is the images average intensity or the double background intensity, but you have to check out own images for good results. Two elimination functions are available to restrict the number of detected segments: Eliminate the segments with very small x-diameters and the very elliptical segments (small aspect ratio). Finally the most important data of all (not eliminated and largest) segments can be printed into the Info window.

12.8.3

Frame Buer To Single Buer

The dialog of gure 12.17 presents an easy way to create multi frame buers or to extract a single frame from a multi frame buer.

Figure 12.17: Dialog to extract frames or to create a frame buer. In the Operation list one of ve possible operation modes is selectable that can be executed by pressing the Execute button. These modes are: Buer range multi frame buer Selected buer(s) multi frame range Change number of frames of buer Extract all frames buer range Extract 1 frame buer Enter the source and destination frames and / or buers in the text elds. While you enter frame and buer numbers additional information is shown on the destination side. E.g. in the example above the input buer range is buer 5 to 8 (that is 5, 6, 7, 8), the 4 resulting frames are assembled to a 4 frame (multi-)buer number 1. 295

12 DaVis in Classic Style

The mode Selected buer(s) multi frame buer adds up to 4 buers (only buer numbers dierent from zero are used) to a new multiframe buer where the selected buers do not have consecutive numbers (buer range). Mode Change number of frames of buer allows to convert old multi image buers to multi frame buers savely. Combinations of frame extracting modes and assembling modes allow to change, cut or include new frames to an image. The extraction of single frames from a multi frame buer into a number of les or even in a set should be executed by function Image Processing (see page 219).

12.9

Acquisition Menu
The functions of this menu support to acquire images in dierent modes. The way of image acquisition (Camera Parameter) and automatic considerations of Camera Scales and Background Subtraction can be set.

Before actually starting the acquisition of images (with the functions of the Acquisition menu), use the functions of the Acquistion Setup menu to control the way of image acquisition and how the images are stored. Under Camera Parameter the Camera card of the Device Manager (see page 57) is opened. Some subdialogs manage the denition of Camera Scales in order to assign these scales to each acquired image, the area of interest to be read out, image transformation and intensity correction parameters. The Acquisition Timing can be used to edit very advanced parameters of the timing le (ACQ le). The actual acquisition performance (which camera to read out, synchronization of camera and laser, etc.) is set here and described in detail in the Command Language manual. If the function Background Subtraction is switched On, the image of a dened Background Buer is automatically subtracted from each newly acquired image. Function Take Background acquires an image in this background buer (of course, without subtracting it from itself). 296

12.9 Acquisition Menu

Switch On Action during Take/Grab to execute the commands which can be set in the Action dialog (see page 298). Display Images Switch this function On to display the acquired images during data acquisition. The display takes place at the end of each acquisition sequence. If switched O, the data acquisition runs faster. No time is needed to paint images on the screen after each elaborated sequence.

12.9.1

Take Single Image

The TakeImage function serves to acquire one image. It is stored in the active image buer. The way of image acquisition (trigger, delay ...) must have been dened beforehand under Camera Parameter. As always, taking one image means, that the sequence of items as dened there is elaborated once. All modes concerning background subtraction and camera scales have to be set in the Acquisition Setup menu.

12.9.2

Continuous Grabbing

This function starts the acquisition of a series of single images to the active image buer. In order to view the images online switch Display Images On. Grabbing is a very good online control of the measurement object. It can, e.g., be used for the adjustment of the optical setup or the setting of the object itself. For an online view of proles select the function Buer - View - Prole. The new image always overwrites the last one, until the execution is stopped by pressing Escape key or clicking on the STOP sign visible right in the middle of the tool bar (only during execution). For each acquisition of one image the sequence of items as dened under Camera Parameter is elaborated once. All modes concerning background subtraction and camera scales are set in the Acquisition Setup menu. Device Control During the Acquisition While continuously grabbing images (and only in this mode), the keyboard can be used to control the connected devices. All actions are commented in the Info window. See chapter on Hot Keys on page 216 for detailed information. 297

12 DaVis in Classic Style

12.9.3

Action during Grabbing

In this dialog box the user can set which device to tune in certain intervals. The set-boxes are only visible for devices declared in the General Hardware Setup and/or Hardware Setup for Camera.

Figure 12.18: Dialog to setup action during grabbing or scan. The Initial CL-command is executed once before the scan-loop. If during scan is selected, a device is moved to a start position before the scan starts. After every single image acuqiotion the position if incremented by a step value until position end is reached. A CL-command can be executed after each step of the scan. You could e.g. store each image before taking the next one, or execute some postprocessing functions during the scan. The Final CL-command is executed once after the scan-loop. See the DaVis Command Language Manual about the usage of this CLcommands in an user programmed macro.

12.10

Devices Menu
All hardware setup functions can be found in the Devices menu. This menu is the basic place in DaVis Classic to setup all hardware components and their I/O or COM-ports.

298

12.11 Window Menu

In the General Hardware Setup (see page 57) all devices in use are set (cameras, PTU, A/D-converter, TTL-I/O-board, stepmotors, spectrograph, lasers ...) and it is specied to which I/O-addresses (ports) they are connected. The settings of the camera(s) are dened under the menu items Camera 1 to 6. Function RS232 communication opens the standard Windows program Terminal, which is used to communicate directly with a device via the serial ports COM 1-4. Any I/I Controller, stepmotor, PTU / Sequencer, DAP Pattern Generator, Laser, Dye Laser, PTU-Laser or XYZ-translation Stage in use are controlled via a separate dialog box. Note, that only the enabled devices are integrated into this menu. Parameter dialogs of disabled devices can not be opened from here.

12.11

Window Menu
This menu supports the control of the Image Display Attributes. The mapping of colors to intensities is dened by the Resolution of the image window. The size of image windows can be changed with several Zoom functions. The dialogbox Tile allows to arrange image windows, buers or les in the DaVis main window. The Window List allows to bring to front (show on top of all windows) opened dialogs or buer views. Some more functions can be used to minimize or close all windows and dialogs.

The last section in this menu can be used to show or hide some special windows: the buer list window, the status bar on bottom of the main window, the tool bar on top of the main window, the palette window and the info window. The contents of the info window can be cleared. The last item in this menu is used to enable or disable the Tool Tip display: This information texts are shown on important dialog items whenever the mouse cursor rests above an item for a short time. 299

12 DaVis in Classic Style

Minimize or Restore All The minimize function iconizes all opened windows (image windows and dialogs), so they are displayed with a small title bar in the lower left corner of the DaVis main window. Here, the screen is empty, but the iconized windows are still reachable and can be restored one by one, when double clicking the title bar of the iconied window, or alltogether with menu function Restore All. Restored windows are displayed at their original positions.

12.11.1

List of open windows

Opens the dialog of gure 12.19 with a list of all open dialog boxes and image windows. The user can select a window and bring it To Front (move it on top of all windows). Button CloseWin closed the selected window, Refresh renews the window list. OK closed this dialog.

Figure 12.19: List of open windows and dialogs

12.11.2

Tile

The Tile dialog (see gure 12.20) helps to arrange image windows on screen, so that they have the same size and dont overlap each other. Press button Tile to arrange the windows and button Close to close this dialog. The following modes are supported: Arrange all open Windows. Press button Close All to close all image windows. Mode Buers will show all buers in memory on screen and arrange them. Use mode Files to load the selected les (by Path and Wildcard) into memory and show them on screen.

300

12.11 Window Menu

Figure 12.20: The tile dialog to arrange image windows on screen.

301

12 DaVis in Classic Style

302

A Appendix
A.1 Software Questions

On general questions about the DaVis software please send a mail to software@lavision.de. Questions about PIV systems should be send to piv@lavision.de.

A.2

Software Downloads

From the LaVision homepage http://www.lavision.de some additional tools for DaVis are available for a free download. The page can be found in menu Download Tools on the website. Some of this tools may be included into newer software versions and installed into your DaVis directory. ReadIMX: Source code in C-language for reading DaVis le formats IM7, IMG, IMX, VC7 and VEC (image and vector data, additional string attributes). The code can be compiled on Windows and Linux systems. Examples to call this DLL and use the code are included for C/C++ and as VI for LabView. MatlabIMX: A small DLL and a MatLab-macro to read DaVis le formats in MatLab V1.2. ConTEXT editor: This very good and free text editor includes a project management and syntax highlighting for the Command Language.

303

A Appendix

304

B Customer Service
If you have a technical problem or questions regarding hardware or software which is not adequately addressed in the documentation please contact your local representative or LaVision service directly. In order to speed up your request please include following information: The order number of your system (see section B.1). The number of the used dongle (see section B.1). A short description of the problem. Your customer settings le (see section B.2). A log.txt if you have a reproducible software problem (see section B.3). An information on the used operating system and service pack. You can contact service at LaVision GmbH by: email: service@lavision.de phone +49 551 9004 229 Alternatively you may submit your problem using the service request interface on the LaVision homepage under the URL www.lavision.com.

B.1

Order and Dongle Number

To be able to nd information on the delivered hardware components and customer details in the database your order number is required. This number can be found in the DaVis/Help/About menu or on the original DaVis installation CD (see Fig. B.1). In the About DaVis dialog you nd the order number in the 3rd line. The ve digits behind the leading X are the order number followed by the DaVis version and the release date. The dongle number is required to exclude license problems. This number is is written on the hardware key. The number of the used dongle can also be found using the DaVis/Help/About menu and on the DaVis CD. Please include the order number and the dongle number in your service requests. 305

B Customer Service

dongle # order #
Figure B.1: Order no. in DaVis/Help and on installation CD.

B.2

Customer Settings

To be able to reproduce your problem it could be essential to know the exact hardware setup and software parameter in DaVis. All currently used parameter can be extracted using the DaVis/Help/Create service le for LaVision Support menu.

After you have selected this the system will write back all values for the relevant variables to an lsf-le. This procedure will take a while indicated by a Busy dialog. The lsf-le will also contain the current settings of the hardware setup, acquisition setup and batch processing operation lists.

The lsf-le will be written automatically to a davis/service subdirectory. The name contains the order number and dongle number that is extracted from your software (#ordernumber/donglenumber.lsf). Send this lsf-le as attachment to the description of you problem by email to service@lavision.de. 306

B.3 Log.txt

B.3

Log.txt

If you have a reproducible software problem in DaVis please generate a log-le. This le contains all functions you have called and all error messages that have been displayed after you have activated the log. Please proceed as follows: Start DaVis and use the Macro/Clear Log le menu. Enable the Log each CL function call (slow) entry in the Macro menu. This feature is active if you see a ag left next to the entry. Every time you click on this entry its status is changed.

Try to reproduce your problem, e.g. until an error message is displayed. A log.txt le has been generated in the DaVis main directory. Send this text le attached to your email. Disable the Macro/Log each CL function call (slow). This function is deactivated if you dont see a ag next to the entry.

B.4

Shipment of defective items

If some items need to be returned to LaVision GmbH for service or repair please contact the LaVision service to obtain a RMA (Return Material Authorization) number. Fill out the Shipment Cover Letter that is available in DaVis/Help directory, in the Help folder on the DaVis installation CD or at LaVision service. List all items with SN and a short description of the 307

B Customer Service

problem. Place the Shipment Cover Letter in the box with the item(s) being returned. Return the authorized item(s) per shipping instructions. Shipping instructions:

Be sure to obtain a RMA number. Include the Shipment Cover Letter. Ship only the items that are authorized. Use the original boxes to avoid damages during transportation. Remove cooling water from the laser! Use antistatic bags for computer boards! Ship returned items to: LaVision GmbH Anna-Vandenhoeck-Ring 19 D-37081 Goettingen Germany Note: Shipments received by LaVision without a RMA number may be refused.

308

B.4 Shipment of defective items

REPAIR SHIPMENT
Customer Contact person @ LaVision GmbH

contact person phone / email

product identification / RMA no. :

qty serial # description

KS
reason for return

fault information

Note: LaVision reserves the right to invoice the labour hours for failure diagnosis, in case no repair order will be placed. With your signature below you will accept this.

Date

Signature

LAVISION GMBH
ANNA-VANDENHOECK-RING / D-37081 GOETTINGEN / GERMANY E-MAIL: INFO@L A VISION .DE/ WWW .L A VISION .DE TEL. +49-(0)5 51 - 9004- 0 / FAX +49-(0)5 51 - 9001-100

309

B Customer Service

310

Index

Index
Anti Virus Software, 20 Autologin, 46 Bayer pattern, 141 Buer Active, 276 Attributes, 105 Compression, 63, 118 Frame Scale, 109 Properties, 105 Scale, 108 Type character, 276 Camera Temperature, 60 CLUT, 126 ColorLookupTable, 126 Constant IM7_PACKTYPE_x, 118 LABBOOK_*, 47 Dialog About DaVis, 40 AcqItemReferenceTime, 202 AcqItemReferenceTimeDt, 203 AcqItemStandard, 201 AcqItemStandardCLcommands, 202 Action, 298 AOI Monitor Prole, 216 AOI Monitor Setup, 215 BatchProcessing, 219 OperationList, 221 OperationListLoadSave, 222 ShiftAndIntensityCorrection1, 236 ShiftAndIntensityCorrection2, 237 Source, 219 BuerAttributes, 114 New Attribute, 116 BuerFrameInformation, 117 BuerHistogram, 114 BuerListWindow, 275 BuerProperties, 106 BuerScales, 109 BuerStatistics, 110 Busy, 41 Camera Intensity Correction, 71 Camera Macro Image, 74 Camera Random Particles, 73 Camera Scales, 70 Camera Transformation, 70 CorrelationMap, 192 CreateMask, 268, 269 DataDisplayAttributes, 132 ToAll, 133, 134 DeleteBuers, 289 DevData Online-Display, 75 SetupCamera, 76 DeviceData, 77 EditCustomerSet, 280 EditGroupList, 286 EditPalette, 130 EditSave, 284 Error, 55 ExportAVI, 190 Compression, 191 ExportWindow, 189 Fast Online Storage, 213 311

Index

FileBrowser, 283 FrameBuerToSingleBuer, 295 GlobalOptions, 48 HardwareManager, 57, 67 AddDevice, 59 Hotkey, 217 ImageDisplayAttributes Add Ons, 135 Add Ons-Attributes, 137 ColorImageDisplay, 141 Font and Color, 136 Frames, 142 Image, 139 MouseWindow, 154 Multiframes, 160 PDF, 163 Prole Display, 185 Prole Range, 186 ScatterPlot, 161 VectorBackground, 149 VectorBackgroundRaw, 153 VectorColor, 146 VectorDisplay, 143 Import, 285 ImportAVI, 282 InfoWindow, 278 Item CL, 208 Item Loop, 203 Item Processing, 209 Labbook Personal, 47 ListOfOpenWindows, 300 LoadSet, 287 MaskDenition, 267 Movie, 291 OverlayEditor, 266 Project Import, 88 Manager, 80 312 Error

Move, 83 MoviePlayer, 87 New, 83 Rectangles, 292 SaveSet, 286 Segmentation, 294 Select Palette, 138 SelectPalette, 139 StartupWindow, 37 Storage Parameters, 63 TakeProle, 186 Tile, 301 User Administration, 45 Dongle Port, 44 Login, 42 Settings, 46 Dongle AKS Monitor, 25 Firewall, 23 HL-Server for Linux, 26 HL-Server for Windows, 25 Licence, 26, 43 Licence Manager, 22 Network, 25 Number, 27, 44 Server, 25 Timeout, 25 Types, 21 Variables, 26, 27 Drag and drop, 281

Wrong Licence Code, 44 Error Report, 54 Example Streaklines, 152 Streamlines, 152 Vorticity, 250

Index

File Compression, 63 DAVIS.COL, 127 LOG.TXT, 54 Name Digits, 49 userpal_N.col, 131 Filetype AVI, 95, 121, 282 B16, 120 BMP, 50, 119 DAT, 120 Default, 50 FITS, 120 JPG, 120 NC, 120 OVG, 122 PNG, 120 PRF, 121, 181, 183 PRM, 122, 183 PS, 121 RAW/RAWW, 121 SET, 122, 285 TIFF, 120 TXT, 119 Firewall, 23 Dongle, 23 Frame Slider, 143, 159 Function AddLineToLabbook, 47 Gamma, 129 Help Dialog, 40 Dialog Item, 39 Image Buer, 105 Gamma, 129

View, 105 Wrapping, 127, 128 Install-SelectComponents, 15 LabView, 123, 303 Licence Code, 26, 43 Linux Dongle, 26 Software, 14 MatLab, 123, 303 Menu Acquisition, 296 Buer, 288 View, 288 Compute, 293 Devices, 298 File, 278 Help, 40 Macro, 53 Rectangle, 290 Resolution, 155 Window, 154, 299 WindowContext, 157 Menu bar, 38 Mouse Wheel, 158 Mouse Window, 154 Online-Help, 40 Palette, 126 Path SETs Default, 49 Project Concept, 79 ReadIMX.DLL, 123 Rectangle Active, 292 Root Mean Square, 111 313

Index

Short Cut Key, 38 Splash Screen, 38 Standard Deviation, 112 Status Line, 38 Status Text, 38 Support, 40 Terminal Server, 24 Tool bar, 38, 274 Resolution, 155 Zoom, 156 Tool Tips, 39, 52, 299 Tooltips, 155 User Privileges, 42, 45 Variable DefaultIM7PackType, 118 DefaultMinImageHeight, 158 DongleCreationDate, 27, 44 DoUserLogin, 42 ExportChars, 119 ExportFloatPrecision, 119 WindowDragRange, 293 View Active, 125 AddOns, 134 External Image, 164 g-3DExample, 166 MultiframeOverview, 159 Prole, 181 Simple 3D Prole, 165 Simple2D, 158 Spreadsheet, 165 Window Active, 125 BuerList, 275 Info, 278 Palette, 277 314

Prole, 181 Windows 64 bit, 24

LaVision
We count on Photons

LaVisionUK Ltd Downsview House/ Grove Technology Park Grove, Oxon, Ox 12 9FF/ UK www.lavisionuk.com Email: sales@lavision.com Tel.: +44-(0)-870-997-6532 Fax: +44-(0)-870-762-6252

LaVision GmbH Anna-Vandenhoeck-Ring 19 D-37081 Goettingen, Germany www.lavision.com Email: info@lavision.com Tel.: +49(0)551-9004-0 Fax: +49(0)551-9004-100

LaVision, Inc. 301 W. Michigan Ave., Suite 403 Ypsilanti, MI 48197, USA www.lavisioninc.com Email: sales@lavisioninc.com Phone: +1(0)734-485-0913 Fax: +1(0)240-465-4306

Manual No 1003001 - Release March 4, 2009